Contents

Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 424
1 of 424

Summary of Content for Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual PDF

WEB ED IT ION

OWNER'S MANUAL

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance infor- mation contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 01 Introduction Owner information.................................... 13 Reading the owner's manual.................... 13 Recording data......................................... 16 Accessories and extra equipment............ 17 Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call*..................................................... 17 Information on the Internet....................... 18 Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy..... 19 The owner's manual and the environ- ment.......................................................... 21 Laminated glass........................................ 21 02

02 Safety General information on seatbelts.............. 23 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 24 Seat belt - loosening................................. 24 Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 24 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 25 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 26 Safety - warning symbol........................... 26 Airbag system........................................... 27 Driver airbag.............................................. 28 Passenger airbag...................................... 28 Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing*............................................................ 29 Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 31 Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion..................................................... 32 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 32 General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)................................................. 33 WHIPS - child seats.................................. 34 WHIPS - seating position.......................... 34 Roll Over Protection System (ROPS)........ 35 When the systems deploy......................... 35 General information on safety mode......... 36 Safety mode - attempting to start the car............................................................. 37

02 Safety mode - moving the car.................. 38 General information on child safety.......... 38 Child seats................................................ 40 Child seats - location................................ 45 Child seat - two-stage booster seat*........ 45 Two-stage booster seat* - raising............. 46 Two-stage booster seat* - lowering.......... 47 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 48 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 49 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 50 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 52

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview........................................... 54 Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview................................... 57 Combined instrument panel...................... 60 Analogue combined instrument panel - overview.................................................... 60 Digital combined instrument panel - overview.................................................... 61 Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 64 Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols...................................... 65 Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols................................... 66 Outside temperature gauge...................... 68 Trip meter.................................................. 69 Clock......................................................... 69 Volvo Sensus............................................ 69 Key positions............................................ 71 Key positions - functions at different lev- els.............................................................. 71 Seats, front................................................ 73 Seats, front - electrically operated............ 74 Key memory* in remote control key.......... 75 Seats, rear................................................. 76

03 Steering wheel.......................................... 78 Heating* of the steering wheel.................. 79 Light switches........................................... 79 Position/parking lamps............................. 81 Daytime running lights.............................. 82 Tunnel detection*...................................... 83 Main/dipped beam.................................... 83 Active high beam*..................................... 84 Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 86 Rear fog lamp........................................... 87 Brake lights............................................... 88 Hazard warning flashers........................... 88 Direction indicators................................... 89 Interior lighting.......................................... 89 Home safe light duration........................... 91 Approach light duration............................ 91 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat- tern............................................................ 92 Wipers and washing.................................. 92 Power windows......................................... 94 Door mirrors.............................................. 96 Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating.................................................... 98 Rearview mirror - interior.......................... 98

03 Compass*................................................. 99 Panorama roof* - general........................ 100 Panorama roof* - operation.................... 101 Menu navigation - combined instrument panel....................................................... 103 Menu overview - combined instrument panel....................................................... 104 Messages................................................ 104 Messages - handling............................... 105 MY CAR.................................................. 106 Trip computer......................................... 107 Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Analog"........................................ 108 Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Digital"......................................... 112 Trip computer - supplementary informa- tion.......................................................... 115 Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 116

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 04 Climate control General information on climate control... 118 Actual temperature................................. 119 Sensors - climate control........................ 119 Air cleaning............................................. 119 Air cleaning - passenger compartment fil- ter............................................................ 120 Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*.............................................. 120 Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 121 Air cleaning - material............................. 121 Menu settings - climate control.............. 121 Air distribution in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 122 Electronic climate control - ECC............. 124 Heated front seats*................................. 125 Heated rear seat*.................................... 125 Fan.......................................................... 126 Auto-regulation....................................... 126 Temperature control in the passenger compartment.......................................... 127 Air conditioning....................................... 127 Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen..................................................... 128 Air distribution - recirculation.................. 129 Air distribution - table............................. 130

04 Engine and passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 132 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - direct start/immediate stop......................................................... 133 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer.......................... 133 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages................. 135 Additional heater*.................................... 137 Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 137 Electric additional heater*....................... 138 05

05 Loading and storage Storage spaces....................................... 140 Jacket holder.......................................... 142 Tunnel console........................................ 142 Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray*................................................... 142 Glovebox................................................. 143 Inlay mats*.............................................. 143 Vanity mirror............................................ 143 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 144 Loading................................................... 145 Loading - long load................................. 146 Roof load................................................. 146 Load retaining eyelets............................. 146 Loading - bag holder.............................. 147 12 V electrical socket - cargo area*........ 147 Safety net*............................................... 148 Safety net* combined with cargo cover.. 151 Safety grille............................................. 151 Cargo cover............................................ 152

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

06 06 Locks and alarm Remote control key with key blade......... 154 Remote control key - losing ................... 154 Key memory*........................................... 154 Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting. 155 Immobiliser.............................................. 155 Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system....................................... 156 Remote control key - functions............... 156 Remote control key - range.................... 157 PCC* - unique functions......................... 158 PCC* - range........................................... 159 Detachable key blade............................. 159 Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching................................................. 160 Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 160 Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery..................................................... 161 Keyless drive*.......................................... 162 Keyless drive* - PCC range.................... 162 Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely 163 Keyless drive* - interference to PCC function................................................... 163 Keyless drive* - locking........................... 164 Keyless drive* - unlocking....................... 164

06 Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade ...................................................... 165 Keyless drive* - key memory.................. 165 Keyless drive* - lock settings.................. 166 Keyless drive* - antenna location........... 166 Locking/unlocking - from the outside..... 167 Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 168 Total airing function................................ 168 Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 169 Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 169 Power operated tailgate.......................... 170 Deadlocks*.............................................. 172 Child safety locks - manual activation.... 173 Child safety locks - electrical activation* 173 Alarm....................................................... 174 Alarm indicator........................................ 175 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 175 Alarm - remote control key not working. 176 Alarm signals........................................... 176 Reduced alarm level............................... 176

07 07 Driver support Active chassis - Four C*.......................... 178 Stability and traction control system (DSTC)..................................................... 178 Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation.................................. 179 Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages........... 181 Road Sign Information (RSI)*.................. 182 Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 182 Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 184 Cruise control*........................................ 185 Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 185 Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode.................................. 186 Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 187 Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 187 Adaptive cruise control - ACC*............... 187 Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 188 Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 190 Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed...................................................... 191 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter- val............................................................ 192 Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode............ 192

Table of contents

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle........................................ 193 Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 194 Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist 194 Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality................................ 196 Radar sensor........................................... 196 Radar sensor - limitations....................... 197 Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action............................................... 199 Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages................................................ 200 Distance Warning*.................................. 202 Distance Warning* - limitations............... 203 Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- sages....................................................... 204 City Safety........................................... 205 City Safety - function........................... 205 City Safety - operation........................ 206 City Safety - limitations....................... 207 City Safety - laser sensor.................... 209 City Safety - symbols and messages.. 211 Collision warning system*....................... 212 Collision warning system* - function...... 213

07 Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion.......................................................... 214 Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians............................................. 216 Collision warning system* - operation.... 217 Collision warning system* - general limi- tations..................................................... 218 Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations.......................................... 220 Collision warning system* - symbols and messages................................................ 222 Driver Alert System*................................ 224 Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 224 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 225 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages................................................ 226 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 228 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - func- tion.......................................................... 228 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- tion.......................................................... 229 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- tions........................................................ 230 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - sym- bols and messages................................. 231 Park Assist*............................................. 233

07 Park assist syst* - function..................... 233 Park assist syst* - backward.................. 234 Park assist syst* - forward...................... 235 Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 236 Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 236 Park assist camera.................................. 237 Park assist camera - settings................. 239 Park assist camera - limitations.............. 240 BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)... 240 BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) - operation................................................. 241 CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)*........................ 243 BLIS - symbols and messages............... 245 Adjustable steering force*....................... 245

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

08 08 Starting and driving Alcolock*................................................. 247 Alcolock* - functions and operation........ 247 Alcolock* - storage.................................. 248 Alcolock* - before starting the engine.... 248 Alcolock* - to bear in mind..................... 249 Alcolock* - symbols and text messages. 251 Starting the engine.................................. 252 Switching off the engine......................... 253 Steering lock........................................... 253 Remote start (ERS)*................................ 254 Remote start (ERS) - operation............... 254 Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes- sages....................................................... 256 Jump starting with battery...................... 257 Gearboxes............................................... 258 Manual gearbox...................................... 258 Gear shift indicator*................................ 259 Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*........... 259 Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*.......... 263 Gear selector inhibitor............................. 265 Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 266 Start/Stop*.............................................. 266 Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 267 Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 269

08 Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 270 Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start......................................................... 271 Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stop- page manual gearbox............................. 271 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 272 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 273 ECO*....................................................... 275 All Wheel Drive - AWD*........................... 277 Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................... 277 Foot brake............................................... 278 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 279 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers......... 280 Foot brake - emergency brake assis- tance....................................................... 280 Parking brake.......................................... 281 Fording.................................................... 285 Overheating............................................. 285 Driving with open tailgate....................... 286 Overload - starter battery........................ 286 Before a long journey.............................. 287 Winter driving.......................................... 287 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 288 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 288

08 Filling up with fuel................................... 288 Fuel - handling........................................ 289 Fuel - petrol............................................. 290 Fuel - diesel............................................. 290 Catalytic converters................................ 291 Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 292 Economical driving.................................. 293 Driving with a trailer................................ 294 Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox... 295 Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 295 Towing bracket/Towbar.......................... 296 Detachable towbar - storage.................. 296 Detachable towbar - specifications........ 297 Detachable towbar - attachment/ removal................................................... 297 Trailer stabiliser - TSA............................. 300 Towing.................................................... 301 Towing eye.............................................. 302 Recovery................................................. 303

Table of contents

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 09 Wheels and tyres Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 306 Tyres - maintenance............................... 306 Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 308 Wheel bolts............................................. 308 Tools....................................................... 308 Jack*....................................................... 309 Winter tyres............................................. 309 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 310 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 310 Tyres - load index................................... 311 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 311 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 312 Changing wheels - fitting........................ 314 Tyres - air pressure................................. 315 Warning triangle...................................... 316 First aid kit*............................................. 317 Emergency puncture repair*................... 317 Emergency puncture repair kit* - loca- tion.......................................................... 318 Emergency puncture repair kit* - over- view......................................................... 318 Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 319 Emergency puncture repair* - recheck- ing........................................................... 321

09 Emergency puncture repair kit* - inflating the tyres.................................................. 322 Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 322

10 10 Maintenance and service Volvo service programme....................... 324 Raising the car........................................ 325 Bonnet - opening and closing................. 327 Engine compartment - overview............. 327 Engine compartment - checking............. 329 Engine oil - general................................. 329 Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 330 Coolant - level......................................... 333 Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 334 Power steering fluid - level...................... 335 Climate control system - fault tracing and repair....................................................... 336 Lamp replacement.................................. 336 Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 337 Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs................................. 338 Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 339 Lamp replacement - main beam............. 339 Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 339 Lamp replacement - direction indicators front......................................................... 340 Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 340 Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps...................................................... 341

Table of contents

9

10 Lamp replacement - number plate light- ing........................................................... 341 Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area......................................................... 341 Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light- ing........................................................... 342 Lamps - specifications ........................... 342 Wiper blades........................................... 343 Washer fluid - filling................................ 345 Battery..................................................... 345 Battery - symbols.................................... 346 Starter battery - replacement.................. 347 Battery - Start/Stop................................. 348 Fuses - general....................................... 350 Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 352 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 356 Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox................................................. 358 Fuses - in cargo area.............................. 360 Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone................................................ 361 Car washing............................................ 363 Polishing and waxing.............................. 364 Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 365 Rustproofing........................................... 365

10 Cleaning the interior................................ 365 Paint damage.......................................... 367

11 11 Specifications Type designations................................... 370 Dimensions............................................. 373 Weights................................................... 374 Towing capacity and towball load.......... 375 Engine specifications.............................. 377 Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 379 Engine oil - grade and volume................ 380 Coolant - grade and volume................... 382 Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 383 Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 385 Power steering fluid - grade.................... 385 Washer fluid - quality and volume.......... 385 Fuel tank - volume.................................. 386 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 387 Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 390 Electrical system..................................... 391 Starter battery - specification................. 392 Type approval - remote control key sys- tem.......................................................... 393 Type approval - radar system................. 393

Type approval - Bluetooth.................... 395 Licenses.................................................. 403 Symbols in the display............................ 406

Table of contents

10

12 12 Alphabetical Index Alphabetical Index.................................. 410

Table of contents

11

INTRODUCTION

01 Introduction

01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13

Owner information Your car is equipped with a display screen* where you can find information on how your car works. This owner's manual is a supple- ment to the information and contains impor- tant text, the latest updates, as well as instructions that can be useful when you, for practical reasons, cannot read the on-screen information.

Changing the display language may mean that some information does not correspond to national or local laws and regulations.

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are fol- lowed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.

If there should be a difference between the information on the screen and in the prin- ted manual then it is always the printed information that applies.

Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the oppor- tunity to familiarise yourself with new func- tions, to see how best to handle the car in dif- ferent situations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the man- ual.

The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not bind- ing. We reserve the right to make modifica- tions without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation

Digital owner's manual in the car1

When the printed manual refers to the digital owner's manual it means the one shown on the screen in the car.

Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press OK/MENU and select Owner's manual.

There are four options for finding information in the owner's manual:

Search - Search function for finding an article.

Categories - All articles sorted into cate- gories.

Favourites - Quick access to favourite- bookmarked articles.

Quick Guide - A selection of articles for common functions.

NOTE

The owner's manual is not available while driving.

Owner's Manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The owner's manual is available for down- load as a mobile application (applies for certain car models and mobile devices), see www.volvocars.com.

The mobile application also includes video and searchable content and easy naviga- tion between different sections.

1 Applies to certain car models.

|| 01 Introduction

01

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Options/accessories All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (fac- tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adapta- tions for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili- tate the use of e.g. features and functions.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the foot- note refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are high- lighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts on the information display (e.g. Audio settings).

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descend- ing degree of importance for the warning/ information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

01 Introduction

01

}} 15

Risk of property damage

G 0 3 1 5 9 2

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

Information

G 0 3 1 5 9 3

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

|| 01 Introduction

01

16

Related information Related information refers to other sections containing related information.

Images The manual's images are sometimes sche- matic and may deviate from the car's appear- ance depending on equipment level and mar- ket.

To be continued }}This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the fol- lowing page.

Continued from previous page ||This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previ- ous page.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 21)

Information on the Internet (p. 18)

Recording data Certain information about the vehicle's opera- tion and functionality, and any incidents, are recorded in the car.

Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle's operation and function- ality. Some of the computers can record information during normal driving if they detect an error. In addition, information is recorded in the event of a collision or inci- dent. Parts of the recorded information are required so that technicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic- ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. In addition to this, the information is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to con- tinually develop quality and safety, as the information can contribute to a better under- standing of the factors that cause accidents and injuries. The information includes details of the status and functionality of various sys- tems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine, throttle, steering and brake sys- tems, amongst other things. This information may include details regarding the way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use, steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers

for a certain length of time, but also as a result of a collision or incident. This informa- tion may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal requirements and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- bed information being disclosed to third par- ties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, due to national legislation and reg- ulations Volvo may be required to disclose such information to authorities such as police authorities, or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it.

To be able to read and interpret the informa- tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo, and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling com- plies with applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

01 Introduction

01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 17

Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can nega- tively affect the car's electronic system.

Certain accessories only function when asso- ciated software is installed in the car's com- puter system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories or extra equipment which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Heat-reflecting windscreen*

Areas where IR film is not applied.

Dimensions

A 47 mm

B 87 mm

The windscreen is equipped with a heat- reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.

The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-reflecting film may affect its function and performance.

For the optimal function of electronic equip- ment, it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the above illustra- tion).

Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call* If the car is equipped with Volvo On Call, VOC it is important to change the owner of the service.

VOC is a supplemental service that consists of safety, security and comfort services. In the event of change of ownership it is impor- tant to change the owner of the service.

Closing the VOC service Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of change of ownership in order to close the VOC serv- ice.

In the event of change of ownership it is important to reset personal settings in the car to the original factory settings2, see Change of ownership.

Starting the VOC service It is very important that the VOC service changes owner so that the previous owner's ability to use services in the car is stopped. Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of a change of ownership.

Related information Information on the Internet (p. 18)

01 Introduction

01

18

Information on the Internet At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.

With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in to My Volvo which is a personal web page for you and your car.

QR code

A QR code reader is required to read the QR code, which is available as a supplemental program (app) for several mobile phones. The QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.

2 Only applies to cars that can be connected to the Internet.

01 Introduction

01

}} 19

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world.

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- poration's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our custom- ers share our consideration for the environ- ment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manu- factured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements

for our partners so that they work systemati- cally with environmental issues.

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- tion in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox- ide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environ- ment as well as highly efficient emission con- trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.

|| 01 Introduction

01

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf- fic outside.

The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.

Interior The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consump- tion for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work- shops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our work- shop staff have the knowledge and the tools

required to guarantee good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regula- tions.

Drive economically - think ahead.

Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the intervals recom- mended in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature more quickly, which lowers con- sumption and reduces emissions.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance - a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 64), Economical driving (p. 293) and Fuel con- sumption (p. 387).

Recycling As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi- ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 21)

01 Introduction

01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

The owner's manual and the environment The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.

The Forest Stewardship Council symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p.

19)

Laminated glass

Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama roof have laminated glass. It is reinforced which provides better protection against break-ins and improved

sound insulation in the passenger compart- ment. Other glass surfaces*.

SAFETY

02 Safety

02

23

General information on seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequen- ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers are using their seatbelts during the journey.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protec- tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor- mal seating position.

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- ten (p. 24) their seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder (p. 25).

Remember Do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught on anything.

The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

Tension the hip strap over the lap by pull- ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a colli- sion, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 24)

Seat belt - loosening (p. 24)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 26)

02 Safety

02

24

Seatbelt - putting on Put on the seatbelt (p. 23) before setting off.

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat1.

Remember The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 24)

Seat belt - loosening (p. 24)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 26)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 25)

Seat belt - loosening Loosen the seatbelt (p. 23) when the car is stationary.

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 24)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 25)

Seatbelt - pregnancy Seatbelt (p. 23) must always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way.

G 0 2 0 9 9 8

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos- sible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri- vers must adjust the seat (p. 73) and steer- ing wheel (p. 78) such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive

1 Certain markets.

02 Safety

02

25

(which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdo- men and steering wheel.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 24)

Seat belt - loosening (p. 24)

Seatbelt reminder Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- ten their (p. 24) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder.

G 0 1 7 7 2 6

The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel (p. 60).

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts (p. 23) are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instru- ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared auto-

matically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk (p. 103) OK button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message in the combined instrument panel along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button.

The message in the combined instrument panel showing which seatbelts are in use is always shown. Press the OK button to see stored messages.

Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed, the audible reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.

02 Safety

02

26

Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts (p. 23) are equipped with belt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten- sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occu- pants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seat- belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

Safety - warning symbol The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) information display.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- bag system (p. 27) in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- bag system in the digital combined instrument panel.

The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel illuminates when the remote con- trol key is in key position II (p. 71). The sym- bol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag sys- tem does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt ten- sioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warn- ing triangle illuminates and SRS airbag

02 Safety

02

27

Service required or SRS airbag Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

Related information General information on safety mode (p.

36)

Airbag system In the event of a frontal collision the airbag system helps to protect the driver and pas- senger from injuries to head, face and chest.

G 0 1 8 6 6 5

Airbag system, left-hand drive car.

G 0 1 8 6 6 6

Airbag system, right-hand drive car.

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.

Related information Driver airbag (p. 28)

Passenger airbag (p. 28)

Safety - warning symbol (p. 26)

02 Safety

02

28

Driver airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 23) the car is equipped on the driver's side with an airbag (p. 27).

This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Related information Passenger airbag (p. 28)

Passenger airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 23) on the passenger side, the car is equipped with an airbag (p. 27).

The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

02 Safety

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 29

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated.

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Switch - PACOS* The front passenger airbag can be deacti- vated (p. 29) if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passen- ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.

Related information Driver airbag (p. 28)

Child seats (p. 40)

Passenger airbag - activating/ deactivating* Front passenger airbag (p. 28) can be deacti- vated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

Switch - PACOS The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. The remote control key's key blade (p. 160) should be used to change position.

Location of airbag label plus switch.

The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but

never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the air- bag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

NOTE

When the remote control key is in key position II (p. 71) the warning symbol (p. 26) for the airbag is shown in the com- bined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds.

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag.

|| 02 Safety

02

30

G 0 1 7 8 0 0

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof console indi- cates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

2

2

G 0 1 7 7 2 4

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof con- sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof con- sole indicates that the airbag is deacti- vated, and if the warning symbol(p. 26) for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car.

Related information Child seats (p. 40)

02 Safety

02

31

Side airbag (SIPS) In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.

G 0 3 2 9 4 9

The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information Driver airbag (p. 28)

Passenger airbag (p. 28)

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion (p. 32)

Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 32)

02 Safety

02

32

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 31).

Child seat/booster cushion (p. 40) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 29) on the front passenger side.

Related information Passenger airbag (p. 28)

General information on child safety (p. 38)

Inflatable Curtain (IC) The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a colli- sion.

Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of the SIPS system (p. 31) and the airbag sys- tem (p. 27). It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A suffi- ciently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side pan- els. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 23)

02 Safety

02

33

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection) WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- tection against whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front seats.

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi- cle all have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information WHIPS - child seats (p. 34)

WHIPS - seating position (p. 34)

General information on seatbelts (p. 23)

02 Safety

02

34

WHIPS - child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p. 33).

Child seat/booster cushion (p. 40) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 29) on the front passenger side.

Related information General information on child safety (p.

38)

WHIPS - seating position For optimum protection from the WHIPS sys- tem (p. 33) the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstruc- ted.

Seating position Set the correct seating position in the front seat (p. 73) before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

Function

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

02 Safety

02

35

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear- end collision.

Roll Over Protection System (ROPS) Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) has been designed to reduce the risk of the car overturning and to provide the best possi- ble protection in the event of such an acci- dent.

The system consists of a stabiliser system, Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the risk of overturning, for example, during sud- den evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.

The RSC system uses a sensor which regis- ters changes in the car's lateral inclination angle. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If a risk exists then the DSTC system (p. 178) engages, engine torque is lowered and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability.

WARNING

Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be seen as an opportunity to increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving.

When the systems deploy In the event of a collision Volvo's different personal safety systems work together in order to minimise injury.

System Triggered

Seatbelt ten- sioner (p. 26) front seat

In the event of a frontal collision, and/or side-impact collision, and/or rear-end collision and/or overturning

Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat

In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning

Airbags

(Steering wheel (p. 28) and passenger airbag (p. 28))

In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) (p. 31)

In a side-impact accidentA

02 Safety

02

36

System Triggered

Inflatable Curtain IC (p. 32)

In the event of a side impact and/or over- turning and/or some frontal collisionsA

Whiplash protec- tion WHIPS (p. 33)

In a rear-end colli- sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags (p. 27) have deployed, the fol- lowing is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an author- ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision.

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the air- bags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it con- veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita- tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

General information on safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the collision may have dam- aged any of the car's vital functions such as, for example, the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument panel.

02 Safety

02

37

Warning triangle in the digital combined instru- ment panel.

If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) informa- tion display. This means that the car has reduced functionality.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in per- sonal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the car

(p. 37)

Safety mode - moving the car (p. 38)

Safety mode - attempting to start the car If the car is set in safety mode (p. 36) then an attempt to start the car can be made if every- thing seems normal and the absence of fuel leakage has been checked.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.

If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service (p. 303) used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once mov- ing.

|| 02 Safety

02

38

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information Safety mode - moving the car (p. 38)

Safety mode - moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset after attempting to start the car (p. 37) , the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.

Do not move the car further than necessary.

Related information General information on safety mode (p.

36)

General information on child safety Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.

The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size; see Child seats (p. 40).

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro- vides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.

02 Safety

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 39

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child safety locks The rear doors and rear door windows* can be blocked manually (p. 173) or electronically (p. 173)* from opening from the inside.

Related information Child seats - location (p. 45)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

02 Safety

02

40

Child seats Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.

G 0 2 0 7 3 9

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.

WARNING

Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

02 Safety

02

}} 41

Recommended child seats2

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys- tem.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cush- ion between the child seat and the dash- board.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

|| 02 Safety

02

42

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cush- ion between the child seat and the dash- board.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

02 Safety

02

}} 43

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with back- rest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and with- out backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

|| 02 Safety

02

44

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.

Type approval: E5 04189

(B)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

Related information Child seats - location (p. 45)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

General information on child safety (p. 38)

02 Safety

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45

Child seats - location Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 40) in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- vated (p. 29). If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri- ous injury if the airbag deploys.

The label for the airbag becomes visible when the passenger door is opened, see illustration (p. 29).

You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat provided there is no acti- vated airbag on the front passenger side.

one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag (SRS) is activated.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but- ton must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 38)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

Child seat - two-stage booster seat* The integrated booster seats in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably and safely.

The booster cushions are specially designed to provide optimum safety. In combination with the seatbelt (p. 23) they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 95 cm in height.

Correct position, the seatbelt should be posi- tioned in on the shoulder.

02 Safety

02

46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Incorrect position, the head restraint must be adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.

Check before driving that:

the integrated two-stage booster seat is correctly set in accordance with the table (p. 46) and in locked position

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder (see preceding illustrations)

the lap section of the seatbelt is posi- tioned low over the pelvis to provide opti- mal protection.

Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is per- formed by raising (p. 46) and lowering (p. 47).

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repair or replace- ment is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi- cations or additions to the booster cush- ion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undam- aged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

WARNING

If the instructions for the two-stage booster seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an accident.

Two-stage booster seat* - raising The integrated booster seat (p. 45) in the rear seat can be folded up into two stages. How many stages the cushion should be folded up depends on the child's weight.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg

Stage 13

Pull the handle forward and up in order to release the booster cushion.

3 Lower stage.

02 Safety

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47

Press the booster cushion backwards to lock.

Stage 24

Start from the lower stage. Press the but- ton.

Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge and press it back against the backrest to lock.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the booster seat from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded down (p. 47) into the seat cushion.

Two-stage booster seat* - lowering The integrated booster seat (p. 45) in the rear seat can be folded down from the upper or lower stage to fully lowered position in the seat cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from the upper stage to the lower stage.

Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion.

4 Upper stage.

|| 02 Safety

02

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it.

IMPORTANT

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering.

NOTE

When folding the rear backrest the booster seat must first be lowered.

Related information Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 46)

Child seat - ISOFIX ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats (p. 40) that is based on an international stand- ard.

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indi- cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

Related information ISOFIX - size classes (p. 49)

ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 50)

General information on child safety (p. 38)

02 Safety

02

49

ISOFIX - size classes There is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX (p. 48) fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct type of child seat (p. 50).

Size class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac- ing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left- hand

G Transverse infant seat, right- hand

WARNING

Never place the child in the passenger seat if the car is fitted with an activated air- bag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

02 Safety

02

50

ISOFIX - types of child seat Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child

seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod- els.

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

02 Safety

02

51

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA

(IUL)

B1 X OKA

(IUL)

A X OKA

(IUL)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal catego- ries.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class (p. 49) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 48) fixture system.

02 Safety

02

52

Child seats - upper mounting points The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats (p. 40). These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facili- tate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the lug- gage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- tions.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 38)

Child seats - location (p. 45)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

03 Instruments and controls

03

54

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 55

Overview, left-hand drive car

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function See

Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 103), (p. 105), (p. 89), (p. 83) and (p. 115).

Manual gear chang- ing in an automatic gearbox*

(p. 259).

Cruise control* (p. 185) and (p. 187).

Horn, airbags (p. 78) and (p. 27).

Combined instru- ment panel

(p. 60).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 252).

Ignition switch (p. 71).

Screen for infotain- ment system and display of menus

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Function See

Door handle

Control panel (p. 168), (p. 173), (p. 94) and (p. 96).

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 88).

Control panel for infotainment system and menu naviga- tion

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Control panel for cli- mate control

(p. 124).

Gear selector (p. 258) or (p. 259).

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*

(p. 178).

Wipers and washing (p. 92).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 78).

Bonnet opener (p. 327).

Parking brake (p. 281).

Function See

Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate

(p. 79), (p. 288) and (p. 169).

Seat adjustment* (p. 74).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 68)

Trip meter (p. 69)

Clock (p. 69)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 57

Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

58

Overview, right-hand drive cars

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59

Function See

Screen for info- tainment system and display of menus

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Ignition switch (p. 71).

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 252).

Manual gear changing in an automatic gear- box*

(p. 259).

Cruise control* (p. 185) and (p. 187).

Combined instru- ment panel

(p. 60).

Horn, airbags (p. 78) and (p. 27).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Wipers and wash- ing

(p. 92).

Door handle

Function See

Control panel (p. 168), (p. 173), (p. 94) and (p. 96).

Seat adjustment* (p. 74).

Headlamp con- trol, opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate

(p. 79), (p. 288) and (p. 169).

Parking brake (p. 106) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Parking brake (p. 281).

Bonnet opener (p. 106) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Bonnet - open- ing and closing (p. 327).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Steering wheel (p. 78).

Function See

Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 103), (p. 105), (p. 89), (p. 83) and (p. 115).

Gear selector (p. 258) or (p. 259).

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*

(p. 178).

Control panel for climate control

(p. 124).

Control panel for infotainment sys- tem and menu navigation

(p. 106) and the Sensus Infotain- ment supple- ment.

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 88).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 68)

Trip meter (p. 69)

Clock (p. 69)

03 Instruments and controls

03

60

Combined instrument panel The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The informa- tion is shown with symbols and text.

Information display

Information display, analogue instrument panel.

The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The informa- tion is shown with symbols and text. There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.

Gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking1, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 115) and Filling up with fuel (p. 288).

Eco meter The meter provides an indica- tion of how economically the car is being driven. The higher the reading on the scale, the more economical it is.

Speedometer

1 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indica- tor3 See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 259), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259) or Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 263).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru- ment panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

warning symbols4

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information dis- play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function- ality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- sure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The informa- tion is shown with symbols and text.

Information display

Information display, digital instrument panel*.

The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The informa- tion is shown with symbols and text. There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.

2 Manual gearbox 3 Automatic gearbox 4 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330).

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Gauges and indicators, digital instrument panel Alternative themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel. Possible themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance". The setting for the theme can be stored in the remote control key's memory when locking the car; see pages Remote con- trol key with key blade (p. 154) and MY CAR (p. 106).

A theme can only be selected when the engine is running.

To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button and then select the Themes menu option by turning the thumb- wheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. For more information on menus, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103).

The appearance of the centre console's screen follows the combined instrument pan- el's theme setting on certain model variants.

Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 115) and Filling up with fuel (p. 288).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indica- tor7 See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 259), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*

(p. 259) or Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 263).

Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 115) and Filling up with fuel (p. 288).

Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 64).

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indica- tor7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p.

5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox 7 Automatic gearbox

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63

259), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259) or Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 263).

Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 115) and Filling up with fuel (p. 288).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 64).

Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indica- tor7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 259), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259) or Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 263).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

warning symbols8

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information dis- play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function- ality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- sure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox 7 Automatic gearbox 8 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330).

03 Instruments and controls

03

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Eco guide & Power guide* Eco guide and Power guide are two com- bined instrument panel (p. 60) instruments which help the driver to drive the car with optimum driving economy.

The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- tics* (p. 116).

Eco guide This instrument provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.

To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61).

Instantaneous value

Average value

Instantaneous value

The instantaneous value is shown here - the higher the reading on the scale, the better.

The instantaneous value is calculated based on speed, engine speed, engine power uti- lised plus use of the foot brake.

Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall dur- ing acceleration and braking.

Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter (with a short delay), which means poor driving economy and hence should be avoided.

Average value

The average value slowly follows the instanta- neous value and describes how the car has been driven most recently. The higher the pointers on the scale, the better the economy achieved by the driver.

Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power (Power) is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.

To view this function, select the theme "Performance"; see Digital combined instru- ment panel - overview (p. 61).

Available engine power

Engine power utilised

Available engine power

The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa- ble engine power9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is available in the current gear.

Engine power utilised

The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.

A large gap between the two pointers indi- cates a large power reserve.

9 Power is dependent on engine speed.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that the system is oper- ating, or that an error or failure has occurred.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Stability system, sport mode

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Main beam On

Left-hand direction indicator

Symbol Specification

Right-hand direction indicator

Eco-function on, see ECO* (p. 275)

Start/Stop, the engine auto- stopped; see Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Not used

ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- shop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS func- tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.

Stability system, sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move- ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine pre- heating. Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

66

Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa- tion display. The message text is cleared with the OK button, see Menu navigation - com- bined instrument panel (p. 103), or it disap- pears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Left/right-hand direction indicator Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

Eco function on The symbol illuminates when the Eco function is activated.

Start/Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto- stopped.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated, or that a seri- ous error or a serious failure has occurred.

Warning symbols

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake applied, digital instrument

Parking brake applied, ana- logue instrument

Airbags SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Warning

A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330).

Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 67

engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- nates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The sym- bol flashes during application, and then changes over to a constant glow.

A flashing symbol in any other situation means that a fault has arisen. Read the mes- sage on the information display.

For more information, see Parking brake (p. 281).

Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi- nates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reser- voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 334).

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reser- voir, see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 334). If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illumi- nated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investiga- ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103). The warning sym- bol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-

tion symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi- ble and close the bonnet.

If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information dis- play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Outside temperature gauge The display for the outside temperature gauge appears in the combined instrument panel.

Display for outside temperature gauge, digital instrument panel

Display for outside temperature gauge, analogue instrument panel

When the temperature lies between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has been stationary then the gauge may show a reading that is too high.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

10 Only cars with alarm*.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Trip meter The trip meter display appears in the com- bined instrument panel.

Trip meter, digital instrument.

Display for trip meter11

The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances. The distance is shown in the display.

Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter.

A long press (until the change occurs) on the left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets the trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip computer - supplementary informa- tion (p. 115).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Clock The clock display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Clock, digital instrument panel.

Display for showing the time12

Set the clock The clock can be adjusted in the menu sys- tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the heart of your personal Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides information, entertainment and functions to simplify your ownership.

When you are sitting in your car you want control, and in today's interconnected world, this includes information, communication and entertainment when it is most suitable for you. Sensus covers all our solutions that ena- ble connection* to the outside world, at the same time providing you with intuitive control over all the car's capabilities.

Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the centre console's display screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Audio and media, Climate control, etc.

11 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.

With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are pre- sented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM* other sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue- tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.

For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement.

Overview

Centre console control panel. The figure is sche- matic - the number of functions and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.

Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple- ment.

Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see separate supplement (Sensus Info- tainment).

Car settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Internet-connected car - *, see sepa- rate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Climate control system (p. 118).

Park assist camera (p. 237) CAM*.

Related information Licenses (p. 403)

12 The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

Key positions The remote control key can be used to set the vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ levels so that different functions are available; see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 71).

Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ted/inserted.

NOTE

For cars with the Keyless* function the remote control key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more informa- tion on Keyless functions, see Keyless drive* (p. 162).

Insert the remote control key 1. Hold the end of the remote control key

with the detachable key blade and insert

the remote control key in the ignition switch.

2. Then press the remote control key in the lock up to its end position.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - hold the end with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 160).

Remove the remote control key Push the remote control key, allow it to eject, then pull it out from the ignition switch.

Key positions - functions at different levels In order to enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ- ent levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the remote control key. Throughout this owner's manual these levels are described using the denomination "key positions".

The following table shows the functions avail- able in each key position/level.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Level Functions

0 Odometer, clock and tem- perature gauge are illumi- nated.

Power seats can be adjusted.

The audio system can be used for a limited time - see the Sensus Infotainment sup- plement.

I Panorama roof, power win- dows, 12V socket in the pas- senger compartment, naviga- tion, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on.

Warning/indicator lamps illu- minate for 5 seconds.

Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the engine has been started.

This key position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoi- ded!

Choosing key position/level Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This

means that the car's electrical system is at level 0.

Key position I - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch13

- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.

Key position II - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch13

- Give a long14 press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Back to key position 0 - To return to key position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Audio system For information on audio system functions with remote control key removed, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/stopping the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 252).

Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing, see Towing (p. 301).

Related information Key positions (p. 71)

13 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function. 14 Approx. 2 seconds.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

Seats, front The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the wheel15.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after changing position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked posi- tion in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Lowering the front seat backrest*16

The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi- ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the back- rest and fold it forward.

4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING

Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Related information Seats, front - electrically operated (p.

74)

Seats, rear (p. 76)

15 Also applies to power seat. 16 The sport seat backrest cannot be folded.

03 Instruments and controls

03

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seats, front - electrically operated The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest angle can be changed.

Power seat*

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/backward and up/down

Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protec- tion which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

Power lumbar support*

Lumbar support, increasing

Lumbar support, decreasing

Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine is running.

Seat with memory function*

The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors.

Store setting Memory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Hold the button depressed to store set- tings while depressing one of the memory buttons.

Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

Heated seats For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p. 125) and Heated rear seat* (p. 125).

Related information Seats, front (p. 73)

Seats, rear (p. 76)

Key memory* in remote control key17

All remote control keys can be used by differ- ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors18.

Proceed as follows in order to store the set- tings and use the key memory:

Adjust the seat as you want it.

Lock the car by pressing the lock button on the remote control key that you nor- mally use. This stores the positions of the seat and door mirrors in the remote con- trol key's memory19.

Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock button on the same remote control key) and open the driver's door. The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically adopt the positions that are stored in the

remote control key's memory (if the seat has been moved since you locked the car).

The key memory can be activated/deacti- vated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

17 For key memory for Keyless function, see Keyless drive* - key memory (p. 165). 18 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors. 19 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

03 Instruments and controls

03

76

Seats, rear The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head restraints can be folded. The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Adjust the head restraint according to pas- senger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button (located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down carefully.

Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat

Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward.

The head restraint is moved back manually until a "click" can be heard.

WARNING

The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damag- ing the rear seat upholstery.

The triple-section backrest can be folded in different ways.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully.

The left-hand section can be folded sepa- rately.

The centre section can be folded sepa- rately.

The right-hand section can only be folded together with the centre section.

If the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

If the centre backrest is being lowered - release and adjust the head restraint for the centre backrest, see the earlier sec- tion "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".

The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the outer backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's lock- ing handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked prop- erly after being folded up.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints*

1. The remote control key must be in key position II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visi- bility.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING

The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.

Related information Seats, front (p. 73)

Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74)

03 Instruments and controls

03

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ- ent positions and has controls for horn and cruise control, as well as menu, audio and phone control.

Adjusting

G 0 2 1 1 3 8

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.

With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjust- able steering force* (p. 245).

Keypads* and paddles*

Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.

Cruise control* (p. 185)

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Paddle for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox, see Automatic gear- box -- Geartronic* (p. 259)

Menu, audio and phone control, see sep- arate Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig- nal.

Related information Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 79)

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Heating* of the steering wheel The steering wheel can be heated with elec- tric heating.

Function

Button position may vary depending on equip- ment selected and market.

Repeatedly press the button to switch between the following functions:

Function Indicator

Switched off Button lamp extinguished

Heating Button lamp illuminated

Automatic steering wheel heating With activated automatic start of steering wheel heating, the heating of the steering wheel starts when the engine is started. Auto- matic start takes place when the car is cold and the ambient temperature is below

approx. 10 C. Activate/deactivate the func- tion in the menu system MY CAR (p. 106).

Light switches The headlamp control activates and adjusts the external lighting. It is also used to adjust the display, instrument and passenger com- partment lighting.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview, light switches

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting as well as ambient lighting*

Button for rear fog lamp

Knob for daytime running lights and park- ing lamps

Thumbwheel20 for headlamp levelling

Knob positions

NOTE

The same lamps are used for daytime run- ning lights and position/parking lamps front. The brightness is higher when the lamps are used as daytime running lights.

Posi- tion

Specification

Daytime running lightsA when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights, side marker lamps front and posi- tion/parking lamps/side marker lamps rear when the car's elec- trical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Automatic switching to posi- tion/parking lamps/side marker lamps when the car is parked.

Main beam flash can be used.

Posi- tion

Specification

Daytime running lights, side marker lamps front and posi- tion/parking lamps/side marker lamps rear during the day when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Automatic switching to dipped beam and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps in poor light conditions or when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

The tunnel detection (p. 83)* function is activated.

The active high beam (p. 84)* function can be used.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

20 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

Posi- tion

Specification

Dipped beam and position/ parking lamps/side marker lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

A Fitted in or under the front bumper.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the car is being driven, as long as traffic situations or weather conditions are unfavour- able for the active high beam function*.

Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment.

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.

Only driver

Driver and passenger in the front passen- ger seat

Occupants in all seats

Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area

The driver and maximum load in the cargo area

Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and are there- fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.

Position/parking lamps Position/parking lamps are switched on with the headlamp control's knob.

Knob for headlamp control in the position for position/parking lamps.

Turn the knob to the position for (num- ber plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running then the daytime running lights switch on instead of the front position/parking lamps.

When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position/parking lamps illumi- nate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of what position the knob is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

82

Related information Light switches (p. 79)

Daytime running lights With the knob for headlamp control in posi- tion and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the day- time running lights are activated automatically in good light conditions.

Daytime running lights during the day. DRL

Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati- cally when the car is driven during the day. A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place if the windscreen wip- ers or rear fog lamps are activated.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensur- ing that the car is driven with its lights in a correct state and in accordance with appli- cable traffic regulations.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Tunnel detection* In markets without automatic dipped beam, tunnel detection activates dipped beam when driving into a tunnel. Dipped beam is deacti- vated approx. 20 seconds after the car has been driven out of the tunnel.

The tunnel detection function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period then dipped beam is kept switched on. This avoids repeated changes to the car's light settings.

Note that the headlamp control's knob must remain in position for tunnel detection to work.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 83)

Light switches (p. 79)

Main/dipped beam With the knob for headlamp control in posi- tion and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the dipped beam is activated automatically in poor light conditions.

With the knob for headlamp control in posi- tion dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is running or when key posi- tion II is active.

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Dipped beam With the knob in position, dipped beam is activated automatically at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also activated automatically if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

With the knob in position dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is run- ning or when key position II is active.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the knob is in position 21 or . Activate/deac- tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end posi- tion and then releasing.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the combined

instrument panel.

Auxiliary lamps* If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use the MY CAR menu system to choose whether they should be deactivated or

21 When dipped beam is switched on.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

switched on/off simultaneously with the main beam22, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 86)

Active high beam* (p. 84)

Light switches (p. 79)

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 92)

Tunnel detection* (p. 83)

Active high beam* The Active High Beam function detects the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. Xenon headlamps only dim the portion of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle. The lighting returns to main beam when the incoming light has stopped.

Active high beam - AHB Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.

Car with halogen headlamps

The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Car with Xenon headlamps

Unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the light

beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed.

Dipped beam directly toward oncoming vehicles, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle.

The lighting returns to full main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Activating/deactivating AHB can be activated when the headlamp control's knob is in position (provided that the function has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR), see MY CAR (p. 106).

22 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 85

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or higher.

Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left- hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Deac- tivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam.

Car with analogue combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol illu- minates in the instrument's information dis- play.

When main beam is switched on the symbol also illuminates in the combined instrument panel. This also applies for Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially

dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam.

Car with digital combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol turns white in the instrument's information display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue. This also applies for Xenon head- lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam.

Manual operation

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.

If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam. However, the knob for headlamp control can still remain in position . The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors

blocked See manual and the symbol are shown. The symbol goes out when these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB becomes available again, or the wind- screen sensors are no longer blocked, the message extinguishes and the symbol illuminates.

WARNING

AHB is an aid for using optimum light composition when conditions are favoura- ble.

The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:

In heavy rain or dense fog

In freezing rain

In snow flurries or slush

In moonlight

When driving in poorly lit built-up areas

When the traffic ahead has weak light- ing

If there are pedestrians on or beside the road

If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road

When the lighting from oncoming traf- fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

When there is traffic on connecting roads

On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

In sharp bends.

For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 83)

Light switches (p. 79)

Active Xenon headlamps* Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro- vide maximum illumination in bends and junc- tions and so provide increased safety.

Active Xenon headlamps ABL

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maxi- mum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR), see MY CAR (p. 106). In the event of a fault in the function the symbol illu- minates in the combined instrument panel at

the same time as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illu- minated symbol.

Symbol Display Specification

Headlamp system malfunc- tion Serv- ice required

The system is disengaged. Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or dark- ness and only when the car is moving.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

The function23 can be deactivated/activated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Head- lamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 92).

Cornering lights Active Xenon headlamps are equipped with cornering lights that temporarily illuminate the area diagonally in front of the car in the direc- tion the steering wheel is turned in a sharp bend, or in the direction for which the direc- tion indicators are used.

The function is activated when main beam or dipped beam is used and the car's speed is lower than approx. 30 km/h.

In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 83)

Active high beam* (p. 84)

Light switches (p. 79)

Rear fog lamp When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when key position II is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control's knob is in position or .

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp's indicator symbol in the com- bined instrument panel and the light in the button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automati- cally when the engine is switched off or when

the headlamp control's knob is turned to position or .

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Light switches (p. 79)

23 Activated on delivery from the factory.

03 Instruments and controls

03

88

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control (p. 187), City Safety (p. 205) or Collision warning system (p. 212) brakes the car.

For information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 280).

Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.

When the hazard warning flashers are acti- vated both direction indicator symbols flash in the combined instrument panel.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warn- ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain on when the car has stopped and are deacti- vated automatically when the car is driven off

again or the button is depressed. For more information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot brake - emergency brake lights and auto- matic hazard warning flashers (p. 280).

Related information Direction indicators (p. 89)

03 Instruments and controls

03

89

Direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continu- ously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see Com- bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65).

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 88)

Interior lighting The passenger compartment lighting is acti- vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.

G 0 2 1 1 4 9

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

90

Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.

Rear roof lighting

G 0 2 1 1 5 0

Rear roof lighting.

Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each respective button.

Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 143) is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light- ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment:

Off right-hand side pressed in, auto- matic lighting deactivated.

Neutral position automatic lighting activated.

On left-hand side pressed in, passenger compartment lighting switched on.

Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote con- trol key or key blade, see Remote control key - functions (p. 156) or Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 160)

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.

Mood lights When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is run- ning, a number of LEDs illuminate, including one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide a low-light and enhance the mood while driv-

03 Instruments and controls

03

91

ing. This lighting goes out for a little while after the normal passenger compartment lighting when the car is locked. The bright- ness is controlled using the thumbwheel on the headlamp control (p. 79).

Home safe light duration Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash; see Main/dipped beam (p. 83).

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Approach light duration (p. 91)

Approach light duration Approach light duration consists of parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.

Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 156), and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote control, the parking lamps, door mir- ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Home safe light duration (p. 91)

03 Instruments and controls

03

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps and has the Active High Beam function then the headlamp pattern must be reset when changing from right to left-hand traffic, and vice versa.

Active Xenon headlamps* No headlamp pattern adjustment is required for cars with the function Active High Beam*. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Headlamp pattern adjustment is required for cars with Active High Beam. The car must be stationary with the engine running when the headlamp pattern is shifted between right and left-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Halogen headlamps No headlamp pattern adjustment needs to be made. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not daz- zled.

Wipers and washing Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with high-pressure washing.

Windscreen wipers24

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, on/off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 343) and Car washing (p. 363).

Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it

24 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 343). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 345).

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button illuminates and the rain sensor symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in posi- tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but- ton . The windscreen wipers make one sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen- sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumb- wheel is turned upward.)

Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from

the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.

Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Wiping and washing the rear window

Rear window wiper intermittent wiping

Rear window wiper continuous speed

Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear win- dow washing and wiping.

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature).

Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- dow wiping25. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at con- tinuous speed, no change is made.

NOTE

On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 345)

Washer fluid - quality and volume (p. 385)

Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the con- trol panels for the other doors operate their respective power window.

Driver's door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons; see Child safety locks - electrical activa- tion* (p. 173).

Rear window controls

Front window controls

25 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 95

WARNING

Check that no rear seat passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if the windows are closed, even when the remote control key is used.

WARNING

If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key posi- tion 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For infor- mation on key positions - see Key posi- tions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the con- trol panels for the other doors can only each operate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.

In order for the power windows to be used, the key position must be at least I - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71). The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its

movement. It is possible to force the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the but- ton up until the window is closed. The pinch protection is reactivated after a brief pause.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.

Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking, see Remote control key with key blade (p. 154) and Lock- ing/unlocking - from the inside (p. 168).

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

96

Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the func- tion for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the but- ton to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.

WARNING

A reset must take place for pinch protec- tion to work.

Door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door controls.

Door mirrors

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illumi- nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING

The mirror on the driver's side is the wide- angle type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Storing the position26

The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the remote control key. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Angling the door mirror when parking26

The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when park- ing for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.

26 Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74).

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking26

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after a short time.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Automatic retraction when locking26

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- matically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- tons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as neces- sary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Automatic dimming* For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function requires that the interior rearview mirror also has automatic dimming, see Rear- view mirror - interior (p. 98).

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- ing in narrow spaces:

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane- ously (key position must be at least I).

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- tion.

Home safe and approach lighting The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting (p. 91) or home safe lighting (p. 91) is selected.

Related information Rearview mirror - interior (p. 98)

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 98)

26 Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74).

03 Instruments and controls

03

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating The defroster is used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors

Heating, windscreen

Heating, rear window and door mirrors

The function is used to remove ice and mist- ing from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

One press of the respective button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily. How- ever, the function is switched off automati- cally after a certain time.

See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen (p. 128).

The door mirrors and rear window are demis- ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +7 C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Rearview mirror - interior The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- matically.

Interior rearview mirror

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control for manual dimming is not available on mir- rors with automatic dimming.

The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward fac- ing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.

The compass (p. 99) can only be specified for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming.

Related information Door mirrors (p. 96)

Compass* The rearview mirror contains an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or when key position II is active, see Key positions - functions at differ- ent levels (p. 71). To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the under-

side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam- ple.

Calibration The compass may need calibrating to show the correct compass direction.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones.

Proceed as follows to perform calibration:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed.

NOTE

Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.

03 Instruments and controls

03

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 0 3 0 2 9 5

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper clip) until the character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, per- form the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated, see Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 128).

8. Repeat the above procedure as neces- sary.

Panorama roof* - general The panorama roof is divided into two sec- tions. Only the front section can be opened - horizontally or vertically at the rear edge (ven- tilation position).

The panorama roof has a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight.

The panorama roof and curtain are operated with a control located in the roof. The control is activated when the key is in position I or II, see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 71).

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.

Always operate the panorama roof with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the panorama roof by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key/PCC* with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Wind deflector

The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the panorama roof is in the open position.

Panorama roof* - operation The blind/roof is opened to maximum during automatic operation.

In ventilation position the front section of the roof is raised at the rear.

Operating

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.

Always operate the panorama roof with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the panorama roof by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key/PCC* with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

The panorama roof and curtain can be oper- ated in key position I or II.

Automatic operation 1. To open the curtain all the way - press

the control rearward to the automatic opening position and release.

2. To then open the panorama roof all the way - press the control rearward again to the automatic opening position and release.

Close the roof/curtain by repeating the pre- ceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward to the automatic closing posi- tion instead.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/closed simultaneously:

To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

To close - press the control forward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

Manual operation 1. To open the curtain - press the control

rearward to the point of resistance for manual opening. The curtain moves towards maximum opening as long as the button is depressed.

2. To angle the panorama roof - press the control rearward again to the point of resistance for manual opening

3. To open the panorama roof - press the control rearward to the point of resistance for manual opening a third time. The pan- orama roof moves towards maximum opening as long as the button is kept depressed.

Close the roof/curtain by repeating the pre- ceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward to the manual closing position instead.

NOTE

For manual opening, the curtain must be fully open before the panorama roof can be opened. For the reverse procedure, the panorama roof must be fully closed before the curtain can be closed.

Ventilation position

Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- trol down.

When the ventilation position is selected the front section is raised at its rear edge. If the curtain is fully closed when ventilation posi- tion is selected - then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm.

Closing using the remote control key or central locking button

One long press on the lock button, see Remote control key - functions (p. 156) and Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 168), closes the panorama roof and all the win- dows. The door mirrors are retracted* and the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING

If the panorama roof is closed with the remote control key, check that no one risks being trapped.

Pinch protection The panorama roof has pinch protection that is triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is blocked by an object during closing. In the event of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind

03 Instruments and controls

03

103

is then opened automatically to approx. 50 mm from the blocked position (or to full venti- lation position). The pinch protection is also active when the glass cover or sun blind is opened.

There is the option to force the pinch protec- tion when closing has been interrupted e.g. in the event of ice forming around the glass cover, by continually holding the control pressed forward or depressed until the glass cover is closed.

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p. 104) shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel (p. 60). Which menus are shown depends on the key posi- tion (p. 71).

Display (analogue combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.

Display (digital combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.

OK access to message list and mes- sage confirmation.

Thumbwheel browse between menu options.

RESET reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a func- tion, see the explanation under each respective function.

If there is a message (p. 104) then it must be acknowledged with OK in order that the menus shall be shown.

Related information Messages - handling (p. 105)

03 Instruments and controls

03

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Menu overview - combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 71).

Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.

Analogue combined instrument panel Digital speed

Parking heater*

Additional heater*

TC options

Service status

Oil level27

Messages (##)28

Digital combined instrument panel Settings*

Themes

Contrast mode/Colour mode

Service status

Messages28

Oil level27

Parking heater*

Trip computer reset

Related information Analogue combined instrument panel -

overview (p. 60)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103)

Messages When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Service urgentA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immedi- ately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

See manualA Read the owner's man- ual.

Book time for mainte- nance

Time to book regular service - contact a work- shopB.

27 Certain engines. 28 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

Message Specification

Time for reg- ular mainte- nance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade.

Maintenance overdue

If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts - contact a workshopB.

Transmission Oil change needed

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Transmission Reduced performance

The gearbox cannot han- dle full capacity. Drive carefully until the mes- sage clearsC.

If shown repeatedly - contact a workshopB.

Transmission hot Reduce speed

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.

Message Specification

Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopB.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tem- porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after star- ting again.

Low battery charge Power save mode

The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the bat- tery.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259).

Related information Messages - handling (p. 105)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103)

Messages - handling Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge and browse among messages (p. 104) that are shown in the information display of the combined instrument panel.

When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears in the display at the same time. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified.

Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge a message. Scroll through mes- sages with the thumbwheel (p. 103).

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previ- ous activity can be resumed.

Related information Menu overview - combined instrument

panel (p. 104)

03 Instruments and controls

03

106

MY CAR MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.

Operation Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons in the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.

OK/MENU - press the button in the cen- tre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select/tick in the high-

lighted menu option or store the selected function in the memory.

TUNE - turn the knob in the centre con- sole or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to scroll up/down through the menu options.

EXIT

EXIT functions Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level, one of the following may occur:

phone call is rejected

current function is interrupted

input characters are deleted

most recent selections are undone

leads up in the menu system.

Short and long press may produce varying results.

A long press leads to the highest menu level (main source view), from where all of the car's functions/menu sources can be accessed.

Menu options and search paths For a description of the menu options and search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Trip computer The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information while driving.

Trip computer content and appearance varies depending on whether the combined instru- ment panel is the "Analog" type or "Digital":

Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Analogue" (p. 108)

Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Digital" (p. 112)

Checking and settings can be made immedi- ately after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con- trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II (p. 71) or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip com- puter.

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.

Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Group menus The trip computer has two different group menus:

Functions

Heading in combined instrument panel

The trip computer's functions or headings are each listed in an infinite loop.

Related information Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 116)

Trip computer - supplementary informa- tion (p. 115)

03 Instruments and controls

03

108

Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Analog" The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information while driving.

The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip computer's display extinguishes - this also marks the start/end of the loop.

Information display and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com- puter's functions + Activates the selected option.

Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the trip computer's headings + Scrolls through the options.

RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection.

Functions Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust functions:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.

3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking/ adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table:

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Functions Information

Digital speed

km/h

mph

No display

Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:

Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with ENTER.

Parking heater*

DIRECT START

- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select- ing time.

- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select- ing time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 133).

Additional heater*

Auto On

Off

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 137).

TC options

Distance to empty tank

Fuel consumption

Average speed

Trip meter T1 and total dist.

Trip meter T2 and total dist.

Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are GREY and have no "tick":

1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel and select/stop on the desired symbol.

2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a "tick".

3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

110

Functions Information

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330).

Messages (##) For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 105).

A Certain engines.

Headings One of the headings in the following table can be selected for constant display in the com- bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head- ings for the trip computer are shown in a loop.

3. Stop on desired heading.

Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel

Information

Trip meter T1 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Trip meter T2 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Distance to empty For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 115).

Fuel consumption Current consumption.

Average speed Long press on RESET resets Average speed.

No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's trip com- puter can be changed to another option at

any time during the journey. Proceed as fol- lows:

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the desired heading.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

Related information Trip computer - supplementary informa-

tion (p. 115)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 116)

03 Instruments and controls

03

112

Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Digital" The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information while driving.

The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip computer's three displays extinguish - this also marks the start/end of the loop.

Information displays and stalk switch controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com- puter's functions + Activates the selected option.

Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the trip computer's headings + Scrolls through the options.

RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection.

Functions Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust functions:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.

3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking/ adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table:

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

Functions Information

Trip computer reset

Average

Average speed

Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table under the next section "Headings" or the section "Resetting with 'Digital'" (p. 115) for information on the proc- ess.

Messages For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 105).

Themes The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 60) is selected here.

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 137).

Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.

Parking heater*

Direct start

- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - timer (p. 133).

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330).

A Certain engines.

Headings Three trip computer headings can be dis- played simultaneously - one in each "win- dow" (see previous figure).

One of the heading combinations in the fol- lowing table can be selected for constant dis-

play in the combined instrument panel. Pro- ceed as follows to determine which:

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head- ing combinations are shown in a loop.

3. Stop on desired heading combination.

Heading combinations Information

Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 115).

No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's heading combination for the trip computer can be changed to another option at any time during the journey. Proceed as follows:

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the desired heading.

Related information Trip computer - supplementary informa-

tion (p. 115)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 116)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

Trip computer - supplementary information The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information while driving. Supple- mentary information of several functions fol- lows below.

Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater* has been used.

Average speed The average speed is calculated for the driv- ing distance driven since the last reset to zero.

Instantaneous The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously - approximately once per second. When the car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage.

Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the display - see the section "Change unit" (p. 115).

Range - distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.

No guaranteed range remains when the head- ing Distance to empty shows "----".

In which case, refuel as soon as possible.

The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more informa- tion on how fuel consumption can be influ- enced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environ- mental Philosophy (p. 19).

Digital speed display29

The speed is shown in the opposite unit (kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument. If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com- puter shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.

Resetting with "Analog" With current trip computer heading - Trip meter T1, Trip meter T2 or Average speed - shown in the combined instrument panel:

Give a long press on RESET - selected heading is zeroed.

Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Resetting with "Digital" Trip meter:

1. Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading combination containing the trip meter to be reset.

2. Give a long press on RESET - selected trip meter is zeroed.

Average speed & Average consumption:

1. Select function Trip computer reset and activate with OK.

2. Select one of the following options with the thumbwheel and activate with OK:

l/100 km

km/h

Reset both

3. Finish with RESET.

29 Only for combined instrument panel "Digital".

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Change unit You can change unit (km/miles) for distance and speed in the menu system My Car, see MY CAR (p. 106).

NOTE

In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's naviga- tion system*.

Related information Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 116)

Trip computer - trip statistics* Information is stored about completed trips containing average fuel consumption and average speed, which can be viewed in the centre console's screen as a bar chart.

Function

Trip statistics30.

Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance, depending on the scale selected - the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km.

Using the TUNE control, the scale for the bars can be changed between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor on the far right changes position between up and down in relation to the scale selected.

Operation Different settings can be made in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106)

Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all previous statistics, go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT.

Reset for every driving cycle - check the box by selecting ENTER and go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT.

With the "Reset for every driving cycle" option checked, all statistics are deleted automatically once driving is complete and the car has been stopped for 4 hours. Trip statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started.

If a new driving cycle is started before 4 hours have elapsed then the current period must first be deleted manually using the "Start new trip" option.

See also information on Eco guide (p. 64).

Related information Trip computer - supplementary informa-

tion (p. 115)

30 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

CLIMATE CONTROL

04 Climate control

04

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate control (p. 124). The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

NOTE

Air conditioning (AC) (p. 127) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possi- ble climate comfort in the passenger com- partment, and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be switched on.

To bear in mind To ensure that the air conditioning works

optimally, the side windows and panor- ama roof* should be closed

Total airing function (p. 168) opens/ closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).

In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.

When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the air conditioning can be tempo- rarily switched off. There may then be a

temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.

Remove misting on the insides of the win- dows primarily by using the defroster function (p. 128). To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.

Cars with Start/Stop* With an auto-stopped (p. 266) engine certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 126).

Cars with ECO* Certain equipment may have its function tem- porarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO (p. 275) function is activated, e.g. the air conditioning (p. 127).

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, sev- eral parameters in the climate control sys- tem's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced - a press of the AC button resets the cli- mate control system, but then with reduced AC function.

Related information Actual temperature (p. 119)

Menu settings - climate control (p. 121)

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 124)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 122)

Air cleaning (p. 119)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

Actual temperature The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor (p. 119) which detects on which side the sun is shin- ing into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Temperature control in the passenger compartment (p. 127)

Sensors - climate control The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the temperature (p. 119) in the car.

The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passen- ger compartment is located below the cli- mate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror.

The humidity sensor* is located by the interior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Air cleaning The interior in a passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Passenger compartment filter (p. 120)

Material in the passenger compart- ment (p. 121)

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p. 120)*

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 121)*

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

04 Climate control

04

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air cleaning - passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is cleaned with a filter.

The filter must be replaced at regular inter- vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the cor- rect filter is fitted.

Related information Air cleaning (p. 119)

Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* CZIP comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub- stances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened.

The air quality system IAQS (p. 121) is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from con- taminants such as particles, hydrocar- bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

NOTE

To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first. However, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must be changed at a regular service.

For more information on CZIP, see the bro- chure included with the purchase of the car.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Air cleaning (p. 119)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

Air cleaning - IAQS* The air quality system IAQS separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment.

If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be ena- bled to ensure the best air in the passen- ger compartment.

In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

In the event of misting, the air quality sen- sor should be disengaged, and the defroster functions for the windscreen and side windows, as well as the rear window, should be used.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Air cleaning (p. 119)

Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)* (p. 120)

Air cleaning - material Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compart- ment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 365).

Related information Air cleaning (p. 119)

Menu settings - climate control It is possible to activate/deactivate or change the default settings for six of the climate con- trol system's functions via the centre console.

Fan level during automatic climate control (p. 126).

Recirculation timer (p. 129).

Automatic start of rear window defroster (p. 98).

Interior air quality system (p. 121)*.

Automatic start of seat heating driver (p. 125).

Automatic start of steering wheel heating (p. 79).

More information is available in the descrip- tion of the menu system (p. 106).

The climate control system's functions can be reset to default settings in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

04 Climate control

04

122

Air distribution in the passenger compartment The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compart- ment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode.

If necessary it can be controlled manually; see the air distribution table (p. 130).

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist- ing in cold weather.

Aim the vents into the passenger compart- ment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in hot weather.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.

04 Climate control

04

123

Air distribution

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - ventilation floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the display screen (see fol- lowing figure) and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected. For more information, see the air distribution table (p. 130).

The selected air distribution is shown in the cen- tre console display screen.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Auto-regulation (p. 126)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 129)

04 Climate control

04

124

Electronic climate control - ECC ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the temperature selected in the passenger

compartment and can be set separately for the driver's side and passenger side.

The auto function is used to automatically control temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation and air distribution.

Temperature control (p. 127), left-hand side

Electrically heated front seat (p. 125), left side

Max. defroster (p. 128)

Fan (p. 126)

Air distribution (p. 122) - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrost- ers (p. 98)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 125), right side

Temperature control (p. 127), right-hand side

Recirculation (p. 129)

AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 126)

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 127)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125

Heated front seats* The front seat heating has three positions for increasing the comfort for driver and passen- ger when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen.

Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- vate the function:

Highest heat level - three orange fields illuminate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).

Lower heat level - two orange fields illu- minate in the screen.

Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- minates in the screen.

Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Other- wise they may suffer burn injuries.

Automatic start of driver's seat heating With the automatic start of the driver's seat heating activated, the driver's seat will have the highest heat level when the engine is started.

Automatic start takes place when the car is cold and the ambient temperature is lower than approx. +7 C.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Heated rear seat* (p. 125)

Heated rear seat* The heating for the rear seat's1 outer posi- tions has three positions for increasing the comfort for passengers when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps.

Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- vate the function:

Highest heat level - three lamps illumi- nate.

Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.

Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.

Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

|| 04 Climate control

04

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Other- wise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Heated front seats* (p. 125)

Fan The fan should always be activated in order to avoid misting on the windows.

NOTE

If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.

Fan knob Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO is selected, then the fan speed is regulated automati- cally (p. 126) - the fan speed previously set is disengaged.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 124)

Auto-regulation The auto function automatically regulates temperature (p. 127), air conditioning (p. 127), fan speed (p. 126), recirculation (p. 129) and air distribution (p. 122).

If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disen- gaged when AUTO is pressed. The display screen

shows AUTO CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

1 Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 45).

04 Climate control

04

127

Temperature control in the passenger compartment When the car is started, the most recent tem- perature setting is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console's display screen.

The temperature can be adjusted with the knob - separately for the driver's side and the passenger side.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Actual temperature (p. 119)

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 124)

Air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the system's automatic func- tion.

When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still con- trolled automatically. When the max. defroster function (p. 128) is activated, the air conditioning is switched on automatically so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.

04 Climate control

04

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.

The selected setting is shown in the centre con- sole's screen.

Electric heating*

Max. defroster

The light in the defroster but- ton illuminates when the function is active.

Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the func- tion.

For cars without heated windscreen:

Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu- minates in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

For cars with heated windscreen:

Start the heating for the windscreen2 - symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.

Start the heating for the windscreen2 and air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2) illuminate in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

NOTE

Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 17) may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

NOTE

Electrically heated windscreen is not avail- able when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 266).

The following also takes place in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the pas- senger compartment:

the air conditioning is automatically engaged

recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.

NOTE

The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

2 If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 99)* must be recalibrated.

04 Climate control

04

129

Air distribution - recirculation Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.

When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

NOTE

When max. defroster is selected, recircula- tion is always deactivated.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 122)

Air distribution - table (p. 130)

04 Climate control

04

130

Air distribution - table Three buttons are used to select the distribu- tion (p. 122) of the air.

Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.

to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate, (not at too low fan speed to enable this).

Airflow to the windows and from the dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

04 Climate control

04

131

Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- dows.

to direct heat or cold to the floor.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 129)

04 Climate control

04

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine and passenger compartment heater* Preconditioning prepares the car's heater, engine and passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced.

The heater can be started directly (p. 133) or with a timer (p. 133).

The heater cannot start if the outside tem- perature exceeds 15 C. At 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the heater is 50 minutes.

WARNING

Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Exhaust gases are secreted.

NOTE

When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from the right- hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel.

Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the heater will be switched off automatically and a message

appears on the information display. Acknowl- edge the message by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 103) OK button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the heater combined with short journeys leads to the battery dis- charging and consequential starting prob- lems.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis. The heater is used for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - messages (p. 135)

Additional heater* (p. 137)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start/ immediate stop Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- senger compartment heater (p. 132), it will run for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is running.

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate the heater and select with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - timer (p. 133)

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages (p. 135)

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer The timer of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 132) is connected to the car's clock.

Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

Adjusting3

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 103) to scroll to one of the timers Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.

5. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.

6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing minutes setting.

7. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.

8. Press OK4 to confirm the setting.

9. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.

10. Select the other time (continue from step 2) or exit the menu with RESET.

Starting 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Switching off A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:

1. Press OK to access the menu.

3 Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off. 4 Press OK again to activate the timer.

|| 04 Climate control

04

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK. > If a timer is set but not activated then a

clock icon is shown beside the set time.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Deactivate the timer as follows:

long press on OK or

short press on OK to continue in the menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

A timer-started heater can be switched off directly (p. 133).

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - messages (p. 135)

04 Climate control

04

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages Symbols and display messages regarding the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 132) differ depending on whether the combined instrument panel (p. 60) is ana- logue or digital.

When the heater has been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.

When one of the timers has been activated, the symbol for activated timer illuminates in the display at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol.

Symbol for activated timer in ana- logue combined instrument panel.

Symbol for activated timer in digital combined instrument panel.

The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.

Symbol Display Specification

The heater is switched on and running.

Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

|| 04 Climate control

04

136

Symbol Display Specification

Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level

Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.

Fuel operated heater Service required

Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 103) OK button.

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

Additional heater* In cold climate zones5 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operat- ing temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compart- ment.

A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 137) is fit- ted in cars with diesel engines.

In a semi-cold5 climate zone diesel-driven cars have an electric additional heater (p. 138) instead of a fuel-driven version.

Cars with certain petrol engines6 have an electric additional heater integrated into the car's climate control system.

Related information Engine and passenger compartment

heater* (p. 132)

Fuel-driven additional heater* The car is equipped with either an electric (p. 138) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 137).

The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven additional heater should be switched off for short distances.

1. Before starting the engine: Select key position I (p. 71).

2. Press OK to access the menu.

3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heater7 or Settings8 and select with OK.

4. Select one of the options ON or OFF using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

NOTE

The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.

Passenger compartment heater* If the additional heater is supplemented with a timer function then it can be used as a pas- senger compartment heater (p. 132).

5 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 6 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned. 7 Analogue combined instrument panel. 8 Digital combined instrument panel.

04 Climate control

04

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electric additional heater* The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven (p. 137) or an electric additional heater (p. 137).

The heater cannot be controlled manually, but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera- tures below 14 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.

Related information Engine and passenger compartment

heater* (p. 132)

LOADING AND STORAGE

05 Loading and storage

05

140

Storage spaces Overview of storage spaces in the passenger compartment.

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat cushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox (p. 143)

Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 142)

Jacket holder (p. 142)

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

05 Loading and storage

05

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Jacket holder The coat hanger is located on the left-hand side of the passenger seat's head restraint.

The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 140)

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and pas- senger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 142) are specified, then there is a ciga- rette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 144) for the front seat, and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.)

Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm (p. 174)*.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 140)

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 144) for the front seat.

The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 142) is detached by lifting the tray straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 140)

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

Glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept in here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked (p. 169)* using the key blade (p. 160).

Related information Storage spaces (p. 140)

Inlay mats* Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the bosses in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 365)

Vanity mirror The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun visor.

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's side* and passenger side respectively, is switched on automatically when the cover is raised.

Related information Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting

(p. 342)

05 Loading and storage

05

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next to the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel con- sole.

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

G 0 2 1 4 4 0

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I (p. 71).

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electri- cal sockets, could be activated by the cli- mate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking heater is activated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!

IMPORTANT

Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.

If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sock- ets, no other current consumer must be connected to the other one.

NOTE

The compressor for emergency puncture repair (p. 317) has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and

ashtray* (p. 142)

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* (p. 147)

1 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

Loading Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 374).

The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote control key, see Locking/unlocking -

tailgate (p. 169).

WARNING

The cars driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.

To bear in mind when loading Position the load firmly against the rear

seat's backrest.

Note that objects must not prevent the func- tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down, seeWHIPS - seating position (p. 34).

Centre the load.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.

Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, caus- ing injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the park- ing brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)

Safety net* (p. 148)

Loading - long load (p. 146)

Roof load (p. 146)

05 Loading and storage

05

146

Loading - long load To simplify loading (p. 145) in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load2.

Lowering the rear seat backrest To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down, see Seats, rear (p. 76).

Roof load The load carriers recommended for roof loads are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety dur- ing a journey.

Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads. For information about the maximum allowable load on the roof, including load carriers and any space box, Weights (p. 374).

Related information Loading (p. 145)

Load retaining eyelets The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information Loading (p. 145)

2 Only applies to comfort seats.

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

Loading - bag holder The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area.

G 0 1 7 7 4 5

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.

1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor hatch.

2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks.

Related information Loading (p. 145)

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones.

Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.

The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the igni- tion switch.

IMPORTANT

Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), Emer- gency puncture repair* (p. 317).

Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 144)

05 Loading and storage

05

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Safety net* A safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

The safety net that is fitted in four mounting points is available in two versions.

G 0 3 4 2 1 3

Safety net, version 1.

Safety net, version 2.

A safety net prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger com- partment in the event of sudden braking. For safety reasons, the safety net must always be correctly fastened and secured.

The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car:

Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat back- rest

Front fitting - Behind the front seat back- rests.

WARNING

Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a cor- rectly fitted safety net.

Attachment, version 1

NOTE

The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.

WARNING

It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the tensioning straps are secured properly.

Damaged nets must not be used.

1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the split upper rod is locked in extended position.

2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.

3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment.

Take care to press forward the rod's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.

Rear fitting.

05 Loading and storage

05

}} 149

4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in the cargo area.

Front fitting.

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.

Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back again - only adjust until the seat/ backrest makes contact with the net.

IMPORTANT

If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back- wards against the safety net then the net and/or its roof mountings could be dam- aged.

5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps.

Removal and storage, version 1

The safety net can be easily removed and folded up.

Release the tension in the net by pressing in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out part of the strap.

Press in the catch and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks.

Break the rod in the centre, fold it together and roll up the net.

The folded safety net can be stored under the cargo compartment floor.

Attachment, version 2

NOTE

The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.

WARNING

It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the snap hooks are hooked in properly.

Damaged nets must not be used.

1. Fold out the safety net.

2. Hook in one of the net's retaining hooks in the front or rear roof mounting with the net's storage pockets facing backwards.

|| 05 Loading and storage

05

150

3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment.

Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.

Rear fitting.

4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's snap hooks into the front floor eyes in the cargo area.

Front fitting.

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the safety net's snap hooks into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the back- rests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.

Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back again - only adjust until the seat/ backrest makes contact with the net.

IMPORTANT

If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back- wards against the safety net then the net and/or its roof mountings could be dam- aged.

Removal and storage, version 2 The safety net can be easily removed and folded up.

1. Press in the snap hooks' spring-loaded flaps and remove the snap hooks from the eyes.

2. Loosen the net's retaining hooks from the roof mountings.

3. Fold up the net.

The folded safety net can be stored under the cargo compartment floor.

Related information Loading (p. 145)

Safety grille (p. 151)

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Safety net* combined with cargo cover A safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

The safety net can also be raised from the rear seat when the cargo cover is extended.

Follow the procedure described in the section "Using the safety net" (p. 148). The straps for folding up are located by the arrows.

Related information Safety net* (p. 148)

Loading (p. 145)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)

Safety grille A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger com- partment in the event of sudden braking.

G 0 3 1 9 7 8

Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and pull back/up.

IMPORTANT

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.

Fitting/removal The safety grille is normally permanently installed in the car because it can easily be folded up in the roof and so be out of the way if a longer cargo area is required. However, if

desired, the safety grille can be dismantled and removed from the car.

For information about the tools required and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa- tion instructions3 that were included with the initial purchase.

For safety reasons, the safety grille must always be correctly fastened and secured when being refitted.

Related information Safety net* (p. 148)

Loading (p. 145)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)

3 Installation instructions no. 30715972.

05 Loading and storage

05

152

Cargo cover

G 0 3 1 9 7 7

Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.

IMPORTANT

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted.

Attaching the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel.

Move the other end piece into the corres- ponding recess.

Press both sides in. A "click" should be audible and the red marking should dis- appear. > Check that both end pieces are

locked.

Removing the cargo cover 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it

out.

2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the other end piece loosens automatically.

Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing disc In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo area when it is fitted.

Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from its support shelves, and lower.

Related information Loading (p. 145)

Loading - long load (p. 146)

LOCKS AND ALARM

06 Locks and alarm

06

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key with key blade The remote control key is used to start the car and for locking and unlocking. It contains a detachable key blade (p. 159) made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys.

The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or PCCs* (Personal Car Communicator).

Additional remote control keys can be ordered - up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same car.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Remote control key with PCC (p. 158) has increased functionality compared with the remote control key, see PCC* - unique func- tions (p. 158).

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

Remote control key - losing If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention meas- ure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

Key memory* The key memory in the remote control key (p. 154) means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different people.

The key memory function is available in com- bination with power seat and power rearview and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors, driver's seat and steering force can be saved in the key memory.

Key memory door mirrors and driver's seat The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key, see Key memory* in remote control key (p. 75) and Adjustable steering force* (p. 245). After locking with the remote control key the set- ting of the combined instrument panel's theme is also saved in the key, see MY CAR (p. 106).

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

For cars with the Keyless drive function, see Keyless drive* (p. 162).

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key (p. 154) the direction indi- cators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.

Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are folded1 in.

Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir- rors are folded1 out.

After locking the indication is only given if all locks are activated once the doors have been closed.

Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/ unlocking with light can be set in the car's menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Alarm indicator (p. 175)

Immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec- tion system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car.

Each remote control key (p. 154) has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the com- bined instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:

Mes- sage

Specification

Insert car key

Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt.

Car key not found

Error reading the remote con- trol key during starting - Try to start again.

If the error persists: Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again.

Immobi- liser Try start again

Error in immobiliser system during starting. If the error persists: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

For starting the car, see Starting the engine (p. 252).

Related information Remote-controlled immobiliser with

tracking system (p. 156)

1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm

06

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system makes it possible to track and locate the car, and to remotely activate the immobi- liser to switch off the engine.

Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

154)

Immobiliser (p. 155)

Remote control key - functions The remote control key has functions such as locking and unlocking the doors.

Remote control key, standard version.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Tailgate

Panic function

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.

Information

Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate

while the alarm is activated.

A long press also closes all windows and sunroof* simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 168)).

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.

Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail- gate while the alarm is deactivated.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

A long press also opens all windows simulta- neously (see also Total airing function (p. 168)).

The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the but- ton and, after a further press of the button - within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.

The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Approach light duration Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For more information, see Approach light duration (p. 91).

Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only. For more informa- tion, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate (p. 169). On cars with Power operated tailgate (p. 170)* the tailgate is opened after the button is kept depressed.

Panic function Used to attract atten- tion in an emergency.

Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec- onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

154)

PCC* - unique functions (p. 158)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 167)

Remote control key - range Remote control key (p. 154) functions have a range of about 20 metres from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade, Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 160).

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running or key position (p. 71) I or II is active, and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel and an audio reminder sig- nal sounds at the same time.

The message is extinguished and the audible reminder signal stops when the remote con- trol key is brought back to the car after either/or:

The remote control key has been inserted into the ignition switch.

Speed exceeds 30 km/h.

the OK button has been pressed.

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

06 Locks and alarm

06

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

PCC* - unique functions Remote control key with PCC has extended functionality compared with remote control key without PCC (p. 154) in the form of an information button and indicator lamps.

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.

Using the information button Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is interrupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Indicator lamps display information in accord- ance with the following illustration:

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.

Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.

Red light flashing alternately in both indi- cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

Related information PCC* - range (p. 159)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

PCC* - range The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and tailgate is approx. 20 m from the car - for other functions up to approx. 100 m.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light travelling around on the PCC.

If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking that shows correct status.

NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last commu- nication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.

Related information Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 162)

Remote control key - range (p. 157)

Detachable key blade A remote control key (p. 154) contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended when ordering new key blades.

Key blade functions Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 160).

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated (p. 173).

access to the glovebox is blocked.

the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated (p. 29).

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

Remote control key with key blade (p. 154)

06 Locks and alarm

06

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 159) is carried out as follows:

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key (p. 154).

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking doors

(p. 160)

Child safety locks - manual activation (p. 173)

Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing* (p. 29)

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors The detachable key blade (p. 159) can be used if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key (p. 154), e.g. if the key's battery has run out.

If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are discharged - then the driver's door can be opened as follows:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For illustration and more information, see Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 165).

NOTE

When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.

For cars with the Keyless system, see Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 165).

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

154)

Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery (p. 161)

06 Locks and alarm

06

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery The batteries for the remote control key/PCC can be replaced.

The batteries for the remote control key/PCC should be replaced if:

the information symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates and the dis- play shows Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries.

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to sig- nals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

Opening Slide the spring-loaded catch to the

side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.

Remove control key (1 battery) 1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

PCC* (2 batteries) 1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side

up. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between

and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.

Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key and two in the PCC.

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

154)

Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

Keyless drive* Keyless drive, only with PCC (p. 158)2 means that the car's lock and starting systems can be operated keylessly.

The Keyless drive function in the PCC allows the car to be unlocked (p. 164), driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply have to have the PCC with you. The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, e.g. when your hands are full.

Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see Remote control key with key blade (p. 154).

The car's electrical system can be set to three different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 71) - with the remote control key.

Related information Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 162)

Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely (p. 163)

Keyless drive* - interference to PCC func- tion (p. 163)

Keyless drive* - PCC range In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from the car door handle or tailgate.

The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the PCC with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is on the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the above figure indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.

If all PCCs are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 71) is active, and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the informa- tion display in the combined instrument panel and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.

2 Personal Car Communicator.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

When the PCC has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audi- ble reminder ceases once either/or:

a door has been opened and closed

the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch

the OK button has been pressed.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Keyless drive* - antenna location (p. 166)

Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely It is important to handle all remote control keys with great care.

If a PCC with keyless function is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

However, if someone breaks into the car and finds the PCC, it can be reactivated. It is therefore important to handle all PCCs with great care.

IMPORTANT

Never leave a PCC in the car.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Keyless drive* - interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the Keyless function.

NOTE

Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the PCC and the key blade as a remote control key, see Remote control key - func- tions (p. 156).

Related information Remote control key/PCC - replacing the

battery (p. 161)

Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely (p. 163)

Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 162)

06 Locks and alarm

06

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive* - locking Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a button on the outer door handles for locking/ unlocking.

Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.

Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the lock button on one of the door handles on the outside.

All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.

NOTE

In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P position; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Alarm indicator (p. 175)

Keyless drive* - unlocking Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres- sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail- gate as normal.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Keyless drive* - locking (p. 164)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade If central locking cannot be unlocked with the PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door can be opened with the PCC's detachable key blade (see Detach- able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 160)).

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also done with the key blade:

1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize. > The plastic cover loosens automati-

cally by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the opening.

2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl- inder and unlock the door.

3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm - remote control key not working (p. 176).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Alarm (p. 174)

Keyless drive* - key memory The key memory3 in the PCC means that cer- tain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different persons.

The key memory function is available in com- bination with power seat and power rearview and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors and driver's seat can be saved in the key memory.

PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver's door.

After the driver's door has been opened by person A with PCC A but person B with PCC B shall drive, the settings can be changed as follows:

Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses their PCC's unlock button, see Remote control key - functions (p. 156).

Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74).

Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74) and Door mirrors (p. 96).

3 Only in combination with power driver's seat* and power mirrors.

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

Keyless drive* - lock settings Lock settings for the Keyless function can be adapted.

Lock settings for the Keyless function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system for MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Keyless drive* - antenna location The Keyless system has a number of inte- grated antennae located around the car.

Tailgate, by wiper motor

Door handle, left rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

WARNING

People who have had a pacemaker opera- tion should not come closer than 22 cm to the Keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the Keyless system.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 162)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried out using the remote control key (p. 154). The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected, see Remote control key - functions (p. 156).

In order that the lock sequence can be acti- vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. With the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate must be closed.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged - lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade, see Detacha- ble key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 160).

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

WARNING

Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. For more information, see Deadlocks* (p. 172).

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see Alarm (p. 174).)

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.

168)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 167)

06 Locks and alarm

06

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Locking/unlocking - from the inside All of the doors and the tailgate are locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on the driver's door and pas- senger door*.

Central locking

Central locking.

Press one side of the button to lock - the other side to unlock.

Press and hold to also open all side windows* simultaneously.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:

Press the central locking button .

A long press also opens all the side windows* simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 168)).

Pull the door handle once and release - the door is unlocked. Pull the door handle again to open the door.

Locking Press the central locking button after

the front doors have been closed.

A long press also closes all side windows and sunroof simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 168)).

All doors can also be individually locked man- ually with their lock buttons - the door in question must then be closed.

Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati- cally when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.

167)

Alarm (p. 174)

Remote control key - functions (p. 156)

Total airing function The total airing function opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Central locking button

A long press on the symbol in the central locking button opens all side windows simul- taneously. The same procedure on the symbol closes all side windows simultane- ously.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.

168)

Power windows (p. 94)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Locking/unlocking - glovebox The glovebox (p. 143) can only be locked/ unlocked using the detachable key blade from the remote control key.

For information on the key blade, see Detach- able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 160).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

Locking/unlocking - tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in several ways.

Manual opening

Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open:

1. Push down gently on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle - the lock is released.

2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

IMPORTANT

Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.

Do not place the lift force on the rub- ber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.

Unlocking with the remote control key

The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the remote control key's button.

If the car is equipped with an alarm (p. 174)* then the alarm indicator (p. 175) on the instrument panel is extinguished to show that the alarm is not armed for the whole of the car. The alarm's level and movement sensors

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate.

If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

Unlocking the car from inside

Unlocking, tailgate

To unlock the tailgate:

Press the lighting panel button. (1) > The tailgate is unlocked and can be

opened within 2 minutes (if the car is locked from the inside).

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key's button for

locking , see Remote control key - functions (p. 156). > If the car is equipped with an alarm*

the alarm indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash, which means that the alarm is armed.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.

168)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 167)

Power operated tailgate The car's tailgate can be opened/closed by means of a button on the lighting panel and on the remote control key

G 0 3 1 9 6 5

NOTE

Consider the roof height when using elec- trical operation. Do not use electrical oper- ation of the tailgate under a low roof height, see under the heading "Interrupt opening/closing of tailgate".

06 Locks and alarm

06

171

NOTE

If the system has been operating con- tinuously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then the tailgate must be opened and closed again to reset the system.

Programmable max. opening Tailgate maximum opening position can be programmed. Can be used for e.g. low roof height in a garage. Proceed as follows:

Open the tailgate manually, hold it in the desired position and give the button on the tailgate one long press (at least 3 sec- onds) and then release the tailgate - the programming is complete.

To clear the programming - move the tail- gate manually to a higher position.

Snow and wind If the tailgate is forced down by something just when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to lower, then it is closed automatically.

Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance pre- vents the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch protection is activated.

During opening - power tailgate operation is deactivated and the tailgate is disen- gaged.

When closing - the tailgate stops and backs off from the obstacle a couple of centimetres.

WARNING

Observe the risk of trapping when open- ing/closing. Before starting opening/clos- ing, check that there is nobody near to the tailgate as trapping may have serious con- sequences.

Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Opening the tailgate The tailgate can be opened three ways (two of which involve this but- ton):

Long press on the button in the lighting panel - hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Long press on the button on the remote control key - hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Push down gently on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle.

Closing the tailgate Close using this button on the tail- gate or manually.

Press the button the tailgate closes automatically.

Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate This can be done four ways (of which three involve this button):

Press the lighting panel button

Press the remote control key button

Press the tailgate's button

Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle.

- The tailgate's movement is interrupted and it stops.

Manual tailgate operation The system is disengaged if the opening/ closing sequence is interrupted in accord- ance with the preceding section.

The tailgate can then be operated man- ually.

Related information Locking/unlocking - tailgate (p. 169)

06 Locks and alarm

06

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Deadlocks* Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from both inside and outside.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key (p. 154) and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked.

NOTE

If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.

The car can only be unlocked from a dead- lock state with the remote control key. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 159). In addition, it is possible to unlock/open the doors and tail- gate on cars equipped with the Keyless drive* by touching door handles or the tailgate's handle.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Temporary deactivation

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

MY CAR

OK MENU

TUNE knob control

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This takes place the menu sys- tem MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

Related information Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key

blade (p. 165)

Remote control key with key blade (p. 154)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Child safety locks - manual activation The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.

Activate/deactivate child safety locks

G 0 2 1 0 7 7

The child safety locks are located on the trail- ing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.

To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 159) to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.

NOTE

A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.

Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.

Related information Child safety locks - electrical activation*

(p. 173)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 168)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 167)

Child safety locks - electrical activation* Child safety locks with electrical activation prevent children from opening the rear doors or windows from the inside.

Activation The child safety locks can be activated/deac- tivated in all key positions (p. 71) higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.

To activate the child safety locks:

Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0.

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Press the button in the driver's door con- trol panel. > The combined instrument panel's

information display shows the mes- sage Rear child locks Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.

When the child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.

Related information Child safety locks - manual activation (p.

173)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 168)

Alarm The alarm is a device that warns in the event of e.g. a break-in in the car.

Activated alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the battery's cable is disconnected

the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instru- ment panel shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is trig- gered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compart- ment heater is used.

To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof when leaving the car. If the car's inte- grated passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the pas- senger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used, see Reduced alarm level (p. 176).

NOTE

One of the alarm sensors is located beneath the cup holder in the centre con- sole, this sensor is sensitive to metals.

Avoid keeping coins, keys or similar metal objects in the cup holder in the centre con- sole as these may cause accidental alarm activation.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter compo- nents in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.

06 Locks and alarm

06

175

Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.

Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton.

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.

Related information Alarm indicator (p. 175)

Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 175)

Alarm - remote control key not working (p. 176)

Alarm indicator The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 174) status.

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit Alarm not armed

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) Alarm has been triggered.

Alarm - automatic re-arming Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 174) pre- vents the car being left with the alarm dis- armed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Related information Reduced alarm level (p. 176)

06 Locks and alarm

06

176

Alarm - remote control key not working If the alarm (p. 174) cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery (p. 161) is discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the detacha- ble key blade (p. 165). > The alarm is triggered, the alarm indi-

cator (p. 175) flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch. > The alarm is deactivated and the alarm

indicator goes out.

3. Start the engine.

Alarm signals When the alarm (p. 174) is triggered a siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.

A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti- vated.

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm (p. 174) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.

The procedure is the same as with the tem- porary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 172)4.

Related information Alarm indicator (p. 175)

4 Only in combination with alarm.

DRIVER SUPPORT

07 Driver support

07

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active chassis - Four C* Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.

Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle.

Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving. Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during corner- ing.

Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi- mum roadholding and rolling in bends is fur- ther minimised.

Operation

Control buttons.

The required chassis setting is selected using the centre console buttons. The setting used when the engine was switched off is re-acti- vated when the engine is next started. The exception is Advanced - it is restarted as Sport.

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The system consists of the following func- tions:

Active Yaw Control

Spin Control

Traction control system

Engine drag control - EDC

Corner Traction Control - CTC

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA

Active Yaw Control The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration.

07 Driver support

07

179

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.

Engine drag control (EDC) EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's abil- ity to steer the car.

Corner Traction Control (CTC) CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.

Trailer Stability Assist1

Trailer stability assist (p. 300) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. For more information, see Driving with a trailer (p. 294).

NOTE

The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) - operation (p. 179)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 181)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation The stability and traction control system (p. 178) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

Selection of level - Sport mode The stability and traction control system is always activated - it cannot be switched off.

However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal, steer- ing wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabil- ises the car.

If the driver interrupts a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the sta- bility and traction control system intervenes and stabilises the car.

With Sport mode, maximum traction is obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.

Sport mode is selected in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 106).

1 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.

|| 07 Driver support

07

180

The Sport mode is active until the driver deselects it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time the stability and traction control system is back in its normal mode again.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 181)

07 Driver support

07

181

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages The stability and traction control system (p. 178) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction

Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

Table

Symbol Message Specification

DSTC Temporarily OFF The system is temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactiva- ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The system is disengaged.

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

and

"Message" There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) - Read it!

Constant glow for 2 seconds.

System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. The system is being activated.

Sport mode is activated.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) - operation (p. 179)

07 Driver support

07

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Road Sign Information (RSI)* The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed.

Examples of readable speed related signs2.

The RSI function gives information on current speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is star- ting/ending and when overtaking is prohibi- ted.

If both a sign for motorway/road for motor- ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.

WARNING

RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

Related information Road sign information (RSI)* - operation

(p. 182)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 184)

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed.

The function is operated as follows

Recorded speed information3.

When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol.

Together with the symbol for the current speed limit, a sign showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be displayed where appropriate.

2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. 3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

07 Driver support

07

}} 183

End of restriction or motorway A corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related informa- tion, e.g. end of a motorway.

Examples of such signs are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

Following which, the sign information is hid- den until the next speed-related sign is detected.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs3.

Sometimes different speed limits are signpos- ted for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an arrow.

Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator.

Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a specific distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol for an additional sign under the symbol showing speed.

Display of additional information

A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplemen- tary information for the current speed limit.

Setting in MY CAR There are options for RSI in the MY CAR menu system; see MY CAR (p. 106).

3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

|| 07 Driver support

07

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Road sign information On/Off

The combined instrument panel's speed sym- bol display can be disabled. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Speed warning

The driver can opt to receive a warning when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maximum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is

exceeded. The function can be activated/ deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 182)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 184)

MY CAR (p. 106)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed. The function has the follow- ing limitations.

The RSI function's camera sensor has limita- tions just like the human eye - read more about camera sensor limitations (p. 220)).

Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI function.

Here are several examples of what can dis- rupt the function:

Faded signs

Signs positioned on bends

Rotated or damaged signs

Concealed or poorly positioned signs

Signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt.

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 182)

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation (p. 182)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

Cruise control* The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.

Overview

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel.

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the speed.

Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).

Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Cruise control* - managing speed (p.

185)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 186)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 187)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

Cruise control* - managing speed The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. It is possible to activate, set or change the speed.

Activating and setting the speed To enable cruise control:

Press the steering wheel button

> The cruise control symbol in the com- bined instrument panel changes from WHITE to GREY and shows that the cruise control is in standby mode.

To activate cruise control:

At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the mem- ory and the combined instrument panel's marking (5) is illuminated/turns WHITE at the selected speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h.

Changing the speed To change the stored speed:

Adjust with short presses on or - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

|| 07 Driver support

07

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 185)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 186)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 187)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. The function can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's mark- ing (5) and the symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY.

Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

wheels lose traction

the foot brake is used

speed falls below approx. 30 km/h

the clutch pedal is held depressed for a short time - however, a few seconds does not activate standby mode4

the gear selector is moved to neutral position (automatic gearbox)

the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 185)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 185)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 187)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

4 Cars with 4-cyl 2.0L engine also allow gear changing.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

Cruise control* - resume set speed The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. After temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 186) it is possible to resume the set speed.

To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's mark- ing (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE and the speed is then set to the last speed stored.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting

.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 185)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 185)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 186)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

Cruise control* - deactivate The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. How it is deactivated is described here.

The cruise control is deactivated with a steer- ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 185)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 185)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 186)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead.

The adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.

The driver sets the desired speed (p. 191) and time interval (p. 192) to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is auto- matically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.

If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to standby mode (p. 192) and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by the Distance Warning (p. 202) function about the short distance.

|| 07 Driver support

07

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- ble distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue Assist (p. 194).

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.

190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 199)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 200)

Adaptive cruise control* - function The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead. It consists of a cruise control sys- tem and a coordinated spacing system.

Function overview

Function overview5.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required

Steering wheel keypad (p. 190)

Radar sensor (p. 196)

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

}} 189

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehi- cle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 192) is measured primarily by a radar sensor (p. 196). Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adaptive cruise control.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when Cruise Con- trol brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal as it may become trapped.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time inter-

val set by the driver. If the radar sensor can- not see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control's set speed. This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's set speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 197) braking may come unexpect- edly or not at all.

The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h6 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 192) at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis- tance to the vehicle ahead.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's braking capacity.

If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver

does not brake, then cruise control uses the warning lamp and warning sound from the Collision warning system (p. 212) in order to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to see in strong sunlight or when wearing sun- glasses.

WARNING

Cruise Control warns only of vehicles which the radar sensor has detected. Hence the warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.

6 Queue Assistant (p. 194) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.

|| 07 Driver support

07

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 194)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle (p. 193)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

(Not used)

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 200)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead.

To enable cruise control:

Press the steering wheel button - a similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel (8) which shows that cruise control is in standby mode (p. 192).

To activate cruise control:

At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the mem- ory, the combined instrument panel shows a "magnifying glass" around the selected speed for a second or so and its marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.

When this symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise control is active and the car main-

tains the stored speed.

Only when the symbol shows an image of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by the cruise control.

At the same time a speed range is marked:

the higher speed with the GREEN mark- ing (6) is the pre-programmed speed

the lower speed is the speed of the car in front.

Changing the speed To change the stored speed:

Adjust with short presses on or - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelera- tor pedal prior to pressing the / but- ton, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored in the cruise control.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

In certain situations, cruise control cannot be activated. In this case, the combined instrument panel (p. 200) shows Cruise control Unavailable.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

07 Driver support

07

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-

sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

To set/change the time distance:

Increase or decrease with the steering wheel buttons / .

At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.

The same symbol is also shown when Dis- tance Warning (p. 202) function is activated.

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If Cruise Control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the car in front is prevent- ing an increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 194)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead. The cruise control can be tempo- rarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

This symbol and the stored speed's marking then change colour from GREEN to WHITE.

Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute7

the gear selector is moved to N position (automatic gearbox)

the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car

7 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. DSTC (Stability and trac- tion control system) (p. 178). If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the combined instru- ment panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off his seatbelt

engine speed is too low/high

speed has fallen below 30 km/h8

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering

wheel button - the speed is then set to the last stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting

.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead.

When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator9, the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel- erate the car towards the vehicle in front.

This function is active at speeds above 70 km/h.

WARNING

Be aware that this function can be acti- vated in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then acceler- ate briefly.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

8 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary. 9 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

07 Driver support

07

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead.

With a short press on the steering wheel but- ton the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 192). With a further short press it is deactivated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 200)

Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead. Queue Assist also provides the Adaptive Cruise Control with enhanced func- tionality at speeds below 30 km/h..

In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the Queue Assist function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").

Queue Assistant has the following functions:

Extended speed range - also below 30 km/h and when stationary

Change of target

Automatic braking ceases when station- ary

Automatic activation parking brake.

Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even though it is capable of following another vehi- cle down to a standstill, a lower speed can- not be selected.

Extended speed range

NOTE

In order to activate the cruise control the driver's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.

With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.

NOTE

Activation of the cruise control below 30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance.

For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the Adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking. The driver must then reactivate it in one of the fol- lowing ways:

Press the steering wheel button .

or

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The cruise control will then resume fol- lowing the vehicle in front.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

NOTE

Queue Assist can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the parking brake is applied and Cruise Con- trol is disengaged.

The driver has to release the parking brake before the cruise control can be reactivated.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.

The driver must intervene him/herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruise control is not sure whether the tar- get object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In certain situations, Queue Assist stops automatic braking at a standstill. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore inter- vene and brake the car himself/herself in order to maintain its position.

Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode in the following situations:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the parking brake is applied

the gear selector is moved to P, N or R position

the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode.

Automatic activation parking brake In certain situations Queue Assist applies the parking brake in order to keep the car remain- ing stationary.

This takes place if:

the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport mode

Queue Assist has held the car stationary for more than 4 minutes

the engine is switched off

the brakes have overheated.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

07 Driver support

07

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

Changing from ACC to CC With one press of the button the adaptive part (spacing system) in the cruise control is deactivated, at which point the car just fol- lows the set speed.

Give a long press on the steering wheel button - the combined instrument panel's symbol changes from to .

> By these means the standard cruise con- trol (p. 185) CC (Cruise Control) is activated.

WARNING

The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

Changing back from CC to ACC Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on

in accordance with the deactivation instructions (p. 194). The next time the sys- tem is switched on it is the Adaptive cruise control that is activated.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Radar sensor The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.

The radar sensor is used by the following functions:

Adaptive cruise control*

Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Distance Warning*

Related information Radar sensor - limitations (p. 197)

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Distance Warning* (p. 202)

07 Driver support

07

}} 197

Radar sensor - limitations A radar sensor (p. 196) has certain limitations, due to its limited field of vision for example.

The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly:

if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean - see subheading "Maintenance" (p. 217).

if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.

Field of vision The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

ACC field of vision.

Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.

In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- ble distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.

|| 07 Driver support

07

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehi- cle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

IMPORTANT

In the event of visible damage to the car's grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen- sor may be damaged:

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The function may completely or partially disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Distance Warning* (p. 202)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action The adaptive cruise control (p. 187) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual this

means that the radar signals from the radar sensor (p. 196) are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car cannot be detected.

In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive Cruise Control - Distance Warning (p. 202) and Collision Warning (p. 212) with Auto Brake are not operating either.

The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action:

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.

190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 200)

07 Driver support

07

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an

even speed and a safe distance from the vehi- cle ahead. Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may display a symbol and/or text

message. Here are several examples - follow the recommendation given if appropriate:

Symbol Message Specification

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.

The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

DSTC Normal to enable Cruise

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) (p. 178) has been set in Normal mode.

Cruise control Cancel- led

The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.

Cruise control Unavail- able

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See manual

The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 196) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides information on appropriate alternatives.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 197).

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

Symbol Message Specification

Cruise control Service required

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press Brake To hold + acoustic alarm

(Only with Queue Assis- tant)

The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.

The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Only fol- lowing

(Only with Queue Assis- tant)

Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 187)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 188)

07 Driver support

07

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Distance Warning* Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front.

Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- tance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

Orange-coloured warning lamp10.

An orange-coloured warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING

Distance warning only reacts if the dis- tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the func-

tion is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Set time interval

Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Time interval - On.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-

sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203

The same symbol is also shown when adap- tive cruise control is activated.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.

The set time interval is also used by the function adaptive cruise control (p. 188).

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

Related information Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 203)

Distance Warning* - limitations Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the distance to vehicles in front. The function uses the same radar sensor as the Adaptive cruise control (p. 187) and Collision warning with auto brake (p. 212), has some limitations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.

The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illumi- nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

For further information on radar sensor limita- tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 197) and (p. 218).

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 202)

Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 204)

07 Driver support

07

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time interval

to vehicles in front. The function has certain limitations.

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 197).

Collision warn. Service required

Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 202)

Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 203)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205

City Safety City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

The City Safety function is active at speeds under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto- matically braking the car in the event of immi- nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away.

City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.

City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking, there will be a collision sooner or later.

The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.

If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 212)* these two systems complement each other.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

City Safety does not engage in all driv- ing situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles and motorcycles or to humans and animals.

City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a higher speed difference, it is only possi- ble to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.

Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 207)

City Safety - function (p. 205)

City Safety - operation (p. 206)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 209)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 211)

City Safety - function City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City Safety will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as sudden braking.

|| 07 Driver support

07

206

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window11.

If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely prevent a collision.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri- vers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfort- able.

If the difference in speed between the vehi- cles is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety may not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain full brake force, the driver must depress the brake pedal. This could then make it possible to prevent a collision, even at speed differences above 15 km/h.

When the function is activated and brakes, the combined instrument panel shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active.

NOTE

When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.

Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 207)

City Safety (p. 205)

City Safety - operation (p. 206)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 209)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 211)

City Safety - operation City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

On and Off

NOTE

The City Safety function is always switched on after the engine has been started via key position I and II (p. 71).

In certain situations, it may advisable to disa- ble City Safety, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind- screen.

After starting the engine City Safety can be deactivated as follows: The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

However, the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started, regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off.

11 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

207

WARNING

The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety is disabled manually.

Related information City Safety (p. 205)

City Safety - limitations (p. 207)

City Safety - function (p. 205)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 209)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 211)

MY CAR (p. 106)

City Safety - limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night. However, the function has a number of limitations.

However, the sensor has limitations and has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.

The laser beam from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- tance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC sys- tems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.

When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.

City Safety is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking.

Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli- sion is unavoidable.

When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice, snow and dirt (see the illustration for sensor location (p. 205)).

Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor

Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.

|| 07 Driver support

07

208

Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked is shown in the combined instru- ment panel it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means in turn that City Safety is not operational.

The Windscreen Sensors blocked message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the wind- screen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.

The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur- face in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.

The laser sensor field of vision is blocked.

Remove the blocking object.

IMPORTANT

If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be con- tacted for replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location (p. 205)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation for City Safety, the following also applies:

Volvo recommends that you do not repair cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the laser sensor - instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted dur- ing replacement.

Related information City Safety (p. 205)

City Safety - function (p. 205)

City Safety - operation (p. 206)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 209)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 211)

07 Driver support

07

}} 209

City Safety - laser sensor The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light (see illustration (p. 205) for sensor location). Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.

The following two labels relate to the laser sensor:

The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:

Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments - Class 1M laser product.

The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam's physical data:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.

Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sen- sor's physical data.

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal x verti- cal)

28 12

WARNING

If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!

Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radia- tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a mag- nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi- lar optical instruments.

Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- sor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we rec- ommend an authorised Volvo work- shop.

To avoid exposure to harmful radia- tion, do not carry out any readjust- ments or maintenance other than those specified here.

The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.

Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye- safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.

The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen.

|| 07 Driver support

07

210

The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.

The laser sensor transmits a laser light when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 71) even if the engine is switched off.

Related information City Safety (p. 205)

City Safety - limitations (p. 207)

City Safety - function (p. 205)

City Safety - operation (p. 206)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 211)

07 Driver support

07

211

City Safety - symbols and messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety (p. 205) system, one or more

symbols may illuminate in the combined instrument panel and a text message may be shown. A text message can be acknowledged

by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 207).

City Safety Service required City Safety is not operational.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information City Safety (p. 205)

City Safety - limitations (p. 207)

City Safety - function (p. 205)

City Safety - operation (p. 206)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 209)

07 Driver support

07

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

Two system levels The Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection function is available in

two variants, depending on how the car is equipped:

Level 1

The driver is merely warned12 of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake.

Level 2

The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver him- self does not act within a reasonable time.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of components included in Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must only be carried out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Collision warning system* - function (p.

213)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

12 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213

Collision warning system* - function "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Function overview13.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk.

Radar sensor14

Camera sensor

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support14

3. Auto Brake14

The collision warning system and City Safety (p. 205) complement each other.

1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.

The collision warning system detects pedes- trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car.

If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or a vehicle then the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1) and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support14

If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake sup- port is activated.

This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is imple- mented.

Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the brak- ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake14

The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic brak- ing function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

13 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 14 With system Level 2 only.

|| 07 Driver support

07

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles or cyclists driving in another direction to the car or to animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Func- tion" and the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warn- ing system with Auto Brake.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a col- lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is always responsible that the cor- rect distance and speed are maintained - even when the collision warning system with auto-brake is used.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detection "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con- tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen- tre line.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects a cyclist receives as unambiguous information as pos- sible about the body and bicycle contours - this implies the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.

The function can only "see" cyclists from behind, who are travelling in the same direction.

For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid- ing a "senior bicycle".

The bicycle must be equipped with a highly visible and approved15 rearward- facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the roadway.

The function can only detect cyclists directly from behind and who are travel- ling in the same direction - not at an angle from behind, not from the side.

Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand edge of the car's imagined/extended side lines may be detected late or not at all.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.

For optimum bicycle detection, the City Safety function must be activated, City Safety (p. 205).

WARNING

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.

The function cannot detect:

all cyclists in all situations and does not see partially obscured cyclists, for example.

cyclists in clothing that obscures the contours of the body or who are approaching from the side.

bicycles that have no rearward-facing red reflector.

bicycles loaded with large objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* - detection of

pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 213)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

15 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

07 Driver support

07

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedes- trians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body - this implies the opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.

In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.

The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying larger items.

The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The camera sensor's capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when street- lights are lit.

WARNING

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.

This function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti- ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth- ing that hides the contours of the body or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.

The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 213)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

Collision warning system* - operation "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Settings for the collision warning system are made from MY CAR via the centre console screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Warning signals On and Off You can select whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off.

When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.

NOTE

The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- tions are always enabled - they cannot be deactivated.

Light and acoustic signals Both the light and acoustic signals can be deactivated after starting the engine. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

The warning lamp (see (1) in the illustration (p. 213)) is tested each time the engine is started by briefly lighting the separate light points of the warning lamp if the visual and acoustic warning of the collision warning system is activated.

Acoustic signal The warning sound can be activated/deacti- vated separately in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed. The warning distance is set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

The warning distance determines the sys- tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro- vides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warn- ings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then change to warning distance Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep- tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with Distance Warning (p. 202) set at time interval 45.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.

WARNING

No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.

Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen. Search with the menu system (p. 106) MY CAR.

|| 07 Driver support

07

218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor16.

For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car sham- poo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 213)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

Collision warning system* - general limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

The function has certain limitations - for example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h..

The collision warning system's visual warning signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 213)) may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.

On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- tance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa- tions the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.

16 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporar- ily disengaged in the event of high passen- ger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal move- ments are large, e.g. a very active driv- ing style.

WARNING

Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front correctly.

The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists17 - the system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions for them at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ness or poor visibility.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.

The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control (p. 187). Read more about radar sensor limi- tations (p. 197).

If warnings are perceived as being too fre- quent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced (p. 217). This would lead to the system warning at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situa- tions where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.

In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.

When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 213)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

17 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

07 Driver support

07

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

The function uses the car's camera sensor, which has certain limitations.

The cars camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:

Automatic main/dipped beam dim- ming (p. 84)

Road sign information (p. 182)

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 224)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 228)

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.

The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in

darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriage- way and detect pedestrians and other vehi- cles.

The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim- ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles cannot be detected in some situa- tions, or they are detected later than anticipa- ted.

During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto- matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign information, Driver Alert Control and Lane

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

Departure Warning functions will not have full functionality either.

The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work suffi- ciently well.

No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snow- fall.

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains.

Wait. It may take several minutes for the camera to measure the visibil- ity.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.

Visit a workshop to have the wind- screen inside the camera cover cleaned - an author- ised Volvo work- shop is recom- mended.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 213)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 222)

07 Driver support

07

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to

assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

SymbolA Message Specification

Collis'n warning OFF

Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision warn. Unavailable

The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto braking was activated

Auto Brake has been active.

The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen Sen- sors blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 197).

Collision warn. Service required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 212)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 213)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 216)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 214)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 218)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 220)

07 Driver support

07

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driver Alert System* The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 225).

Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 228).

A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.

WARNING

Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a sup- plementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 224)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 226)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 225)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 228)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* The DAC function is intended to attract the driver's attention when he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes dis- tracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.

A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.

In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals, and make sure you are well rested.

Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warn- ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:

in strong side winds

on rutted road surfaces.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations (p. 220).

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 224)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 225)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 226)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation Settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system. For infor- mation on how the menu system is used, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Car with LDW can show this on the screen.

The Driver Alert function can be set in standby mode. The function can be acti- vated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h.

If the vehicle is being driven errati- cally, the driver is notified by an acoustic signal plus the text mes- sage Driver Alert Time for a break

- the linked symbol is illuminated in the com- bined instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving abil- ity does not improve.

The warning symbol can go off:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.

In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 224)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 224)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 226)

07 Driver support

07

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages DAC (p. 224) can show symbols and text messages on the combined instrument panel

or in the centre console's display screen in different situations.

Combined instrument panel

SymbolA Message Specification

Driver Alert Time for a break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen Sensors blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

Driver Alert Sys Service required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Display

Sym- bolA

Message Specification

Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.

Driver Alert Available The function is activated.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227

Sym- bolA

Message Specification

Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.

Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disen- gaged. Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 224)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 224)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 225)

07 Driver support

07

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*

Lane Departure Warning is one of the func- tions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to as LDW (Lane Departure Warning).

The function is intended for use on motor- ways and similar major roads in order to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations.

Principle for LDW

(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)

LDW consists of a camera that detects the side lines painted on the road/lane.

If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side line of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.

NOTE

The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 224)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- tions (p. 230)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- tion (p. 229)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages (p. 231)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function Certain settings can be made for the Lane Departure Warning function.

Off & On

LDW is engaged or disengaged using a but- ton on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on.

This function is complemented in the com- bined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations.

Personal preferences Settings are made from the centre console's screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

Select from the options:

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229

On at start-up - The function enters standby mode every time the engine is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.

Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- tions (p. 230)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- tion (p. 229)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages (p. 231)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation LDW is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in dif- ferent situations. Here are some examples:

The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in the figure).

The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines - the function is active and detects/"sees" one side line, or both.

The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the function is active but detects neither left nor right side line.

or

The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the function is in standby mode because the speed is below 65 km/h.

The LDW symbol has no side lines - the function is deactivated.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- tions (p. 230)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages (p. 231)

07 Driver support

07

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is restricted in a similar way to the human eye.

For more information, read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

NOTE

There are some situations where LDW does not give any warning, such as:

Direction indicators are switched on

The driver has his/her foot on the brake pedal18

In the event of rapid depression of the accelerator pedal18

In the event of rapid steering wheel movements18

If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- tion (p. 229)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages (p. 231)

18 When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 228).

07 Driver support

07

}} 231

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages In situations where there is no LDW function a symbol may be shown in the combined

instrument panel in combination with an explanatory message - follow the recommen- dation given if appropriate.

Message examples:

SymbolA Message Specification

Lane departure warning ON/ Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart. Warning Unavail- able at this speed

The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.

Lane Depart. Warning Unavail- able

The lane does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

Lane Depart. Warning Availa- ble

The function scans the lane's side markings.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

Driver Alert Sys Service required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

|| 07 Driver support

07

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- tions (p. 230)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 228)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- tion (p. 229)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233

Park Assist* Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob. The sound level can also be adjusted in the audio settings menu, which is accessed by pressing SOUND or in the car's menu system (p. 106) MY CAR19.

Parking assistance is available in two vari- ants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.

The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of e.g. people or animals near the car.

Related information Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 236)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 235)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 234)

Park assist camera (p. 237)

Park assist syst* - function The parking assistance system is automati- cally activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.

If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 243) the indicator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 240) once, then parking assistance is activated using the button.

19 Depending on the audio and media system.

|| 07 Driver support

07

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear.

The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.

Marked sectors show which of the four sen- sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car par- ticularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are temporarily unable to function opti- mally.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 235)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 234)

Park assist camera (p. 237)

Park assist syst* - backward Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow- bar, rear parking assistance is switched off automatically - otherwise the sensors would react to the trailer.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 235)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 236)

Park assist camera (p. 237)

Park assist syst* - forward Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The parking assistance system is automati- cally activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.

Front park assist is active up to approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the sys- tem is activated. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.

NOTE

Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an auto- matic gearbox.

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 234)

Park assist camera (p. 237)

07 Driver support

07

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park assist syst* - fault indication Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

If the combined instrument panel's information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the text message

Park assist syst Service required is shown then parking assistance is disengaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assis- tance system may produce incorrect warn- ing signals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultra- sonic frequencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 235)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 234)

Park assist camera (p. 237)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

G 0 3 1 4 0 2

Sensor location, front.

Sensor location, rear.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 233)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 235)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 236)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 234)

Park assist camera (p. 237)

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

Park assist camera

The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged (can be changed in the settings menu (p. 239)).

The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

The parking camera serves as an aid. It does not relieve the driver of respon- sibility when reversing.

The camera has blind spots, where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car.

Function and operation

CAM button location.

The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides.

The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar.

Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the camera image is displayed on the screen.

When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate

where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle, this facilitates tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The cars approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of two dashed lines. These park assist lines can be switched off in the settings menu.

If the car is also equipped with parking assis- tance sensors* then their information is dis- played graphically as coloured fields in order to illustrate the distance to detected obsta- cles, see the heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the text.

The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or 35 km/h backward.

Camera location next to the opening handle.

|| 07 Driver support

07

238

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light condi- tions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis- played for the driver.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel move-

ment, which shows the driver the path the car will then take - also when the car is turning.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.

The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.

The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

IMPORTANT

Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car - pay attention to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing.

Boundary lines

The system's different lines20.

Boundary line, free reversing zone

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also when the car is turning.

The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

20 The figure is schematic and does not show the model in question in an accurate way.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

Cars with reversing sensors*

Four coloured areas (one per sensor) show dis- tance.

If the car is also equipped with parking assis- tance sensors (parking assistance sensors (p. 233)) the distance indication will be more pre- cise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are registering an obstacle.

Colour / paint Distance (metres)

Light yellow 0.71.5

Yellow 0,50,7

Orange 0,30,5

Red 00.3

Related information Park assist camera - settings (p. 239)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 240)

Park Assist* (p. 233) Park assist camera - settings The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

Settings To change the settings for the parking cam- era:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown.

2. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/ MENU.

3. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.

or

1. Press CAM.

2. Press OK/MENU.

3. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/ MENU.

4. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.

Miscellaneous The default setting is that the camera is acti- vated when reverse gear is engaged.

One press on CAM activates the camera even if reverse gear is not engaged.

Change between normal and zoomed image by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM.

Towbar The camera can be used with advantage for coupling a trailer. A park assist line for the

|| 07 Driver support

07

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can be shown on the screen - just as for the "wheel tracks".

If precise manoeuvring is required then the towbar can be zoomed in by pressing CAM - pressing the button again returns to normal view.

The towbar's park assist line is activated in the menu system after pressing OK/MENU where you can select to display either the "wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both options cannot be shown simultane- ously.

Related information Park assist camera (p. 237)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 240)

Park Assist* (p. 233)

MY CAR (p. 106)

Park assist camera - limitations The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.

To bear in mind Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- cles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.

Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.

Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.

Related information Park assist camera (p. 237)

Park assist camera - settings (p. 239)

Park Assist* (p. 233)

BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:

vehicles in the car's blind spot

rapidly approaching vehicles in the left and right-hand lanes closest to the car.

The BLIS function CTA (p. 243) (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:

crossing traffic when the car is reversed.

WARNING

BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mir- rors.

BLIS can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

Overview

BLIS lamp location21.

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehi- cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

Maintenance

Sensor location.

The sensors for the BLIS functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.

To ensure optimal functionality the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Related information BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) -

operation (p. 241)

BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) - operation BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

Activate/deactivate BLIS BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

Button for activating/deactivating.

The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti- vated by pressing the BLIS button on the centre console.

Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the func-

21 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

|| 07 Driver support

07

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

tion is handled by the car's menu system (p. 106) MY CAR.

When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation.

To extinguish the message:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

or

Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message extinguishes.

When BLIS operates

Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for rapidly approaching vehicle.

The BLIS function is active at speeds above approx. 10 km/h.

The system is designed to react when:

the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles

the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up by another vehicle.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con- stant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.

Limitations Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can

reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect hazards if it is covered.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the car's electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Related information BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.

240)

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 245)

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to BLIS (p. 240).

Activate/deactivate CTA CTA is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps for BLIS in the door panels flashing once.

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.

The CTA function can be deactivated with the Parking assistance (p. 233) On/Off button. The BLIS lamp flashes once on activation

WARNING

CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

CTA can never replace the driver's respon- sibility and attention - it is always the driv- er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man- ner.

When CTA operates

Principle for CTA.

CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side dur- ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when the gearbox's reverse position is selected.

If CTA detects something approaching from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right-hand speaker, depending on the direction from which the object is approaching.

CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps.

An additional warning is provided in the form of an illuminated icon in the display screen's PAS graphics (p. 233).

Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situa- tions, but has a certain limitation - for exam- ple, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.

Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of vision" may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

|| 07 Driver support

07

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

Blind CTA sector.

Sector where CTA can detect/"see".

In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind" on one side.

However, when the driver is slowly reversing the car, the angle is changed in relation to the

vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the blind sector rapidly decreases.

Examples of further limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect hazards if it is covered.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Maintenance

Sensor location.

The sensors for the CTA functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.

To ensure optimal functionality the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Related information BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.

240)

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 245)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

BLIS - symbols and messages In situations where the BLIS (p. 240) and CTA (p. 243) functions fail or are interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a sym- bol, supplemented by an explanatory mes- sage. Follow any recommendation given.

Message examples:

Message Specification

CTA OFF CTA is manually switched off - BLIS is active.

BLIS and CTA OFF Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA are tempo- rarily non-operational because a trailer is con- nected to the car's electri- cal system.

BLIS and CTA Serv- ice required

BLIS and CTA are non- operational.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direc- tion indicator stalk.

Related information BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.

240)

Adjustable steering force* Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.

The driver can choose between three differ- ent levels of steering force for road respon- siveness or steering sensitivity. The setting is made in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 106).

This setting is not accessible when the car is moving.

NOTE

In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance the combined instru- ment panel shows a message.

Related information MY CAR (p. 106)

STARTING AND DRIVING

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

Alcolock* The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.

WARNING

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.

Related information Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.

247)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 249)

Alcolock* - storage (p. 248)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p. 248)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages (p. 251)

Alcolock* - functions and operation

Functions

Nozzle for breath test.

Switch.

Transmission button.

Lamp for battery status.

Lamp for result of breath test.

Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

Operation - battery Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:

Indicator lamp (4)

Battery status

Green flash- ing

Charging in progress

Green Fully charged

Yellow Semi-charged

Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.

NOTE

Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.

Related information Alcolock* (p. 247)

Alcolock* - storage (p. 248)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 249)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p. 248)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages (p. 251)

1 Also called Alcoguard.

08 Starting and driving

08

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alcolock* - storage Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its holder and releasing it - it then springs out and can be removed from the holder.

Handheld unit storage and charging station.

Replace the handheld unit in the holder by pushing it in until it engages.

Store the handheld unit in the holder - this provides it with the best protection and keeps its batteries fully charged.

Related information Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.

247)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p. 248)

Alcolock* (p. 247)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 249)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages (p. 251)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).

3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test.

4. If no message is shown then the trans- mission to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to trans- mit the result to the car manually.

5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alco- lock in its holder.

6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249

Result after breath test

Indicator lamp (5) + Display text

Specification

Green lamp + Alcoguard Approved test

Start the engine - no alcohol content meas- ured.

Yellow lamp + Alcoguard Approved test

Engine starting possi- ble - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.

Red lamp + Dis- approved test Wait 1 minute

Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.

A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what applies in your country. See also Alcolock* (p. 247)

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

Related information Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.

247)

Alcolock* - storage (p. 248)

Alcolock* (p. 247)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages (p. 251)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:

Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.

In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Calibration and service The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop2 every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary the combined instrument panel shows the mes- sage Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibra- tion is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the Bypass function will then be possible, see the following heading "Emergency situation".

The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the message permanently.

Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 to +85 10

-5 to +10 60

-40 to -5 180

At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In which case, connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.

Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.

NOTE

All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see Recording data (p. 16).

After the Bypass function has been activated the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a work- shop2.

The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.

When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop2.

Activating the Bypass function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- ment panel first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after which the engine can be started.

This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop2.

Activating the Emergency function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started.

This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop2.

Related information Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.

247)

Alcolock* - storage (p. 248)

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p. 248)

Alcolock* (p. 247)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages (p. 251)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages In addition to the previously described mes- sages related to how the alcolock works before starting the engine (p. 248) the com- bined instrument panel's display can also show the following:

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Restart possi- ble

The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine star- ting possible without new test.

Alcoguard Service required

Contact a workshopA.

Alcoguard No signal

Transmission failed - send manually with but- ton (3) or take a new breath test.

Alcoguard Invalid test

Test failed - take a new breath test.

Alcoguard Blow longer

Blowing too short - blow for longer.

Alcoguard Blow softer

Blowing too hard - blow more gently.

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Blow harder

Blowing too weak - blow harder.

Alcoguard wait Preheat- ing

Heating not finished - wait for text Alcoguard Blow 5 seconds.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.

247)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 249)

Alcolock* - storage (p. 248)

Alcolock* (p. 247)

08 Starting and driving

08

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Starting the engine The engine is started and switched off using the remote control key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Petrol and diesel engine

Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - hold the end with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 160).

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch and press it in to its end posi- tion. Note that if the car is equipped with Alcolock* then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started. For more information on the Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 247).

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed3. (For cars with automatic gearbox - depress the brake pedal.)

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.

When the engine is started the starter motor works until the engine is started or until the overheating protection triggers.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch after starting the engine or when the car is being towed.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works - see Key positions (p. 71).

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal oper- ating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Keyless drive* Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 162) starting of the engine.

NOTE

A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the Keyless drive function is in the passen- ger compartment or cargo area.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.

3 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.

08 Starting and driving

08

253

Related information Switching off the engine (p. 253)

Switching off the engine The engine is switched off using the START/ STOP ENGINE button.

To stop the engine:

Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine stops.

If the gear selector is not in P position or if the car is moving:

Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or hold the button depressed until the engine stops.

Related information Key positions (p. 71)

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.

Function The steering lock unlocks when the

remote control key is in the ignition switch4 and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.

The steering lock locks when the driver's door is opened after the engine has been switched off.

A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 252)

Key positions (p. 71)

Steering wheel (p. 78)

4 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

08 Starting and driving

08

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote start (ERS)* Remote start (ERS Engine Remote Start) means that the car's engine can be started remotely using the remote control key or the PCC key. This is so that the passenger com- partment can be warmed up/cooled down before departure.

The climate control system and audio system start with the same settings that were in use when the car was parked.

An ERS-started engine is activated for a maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off. After two ERS-activations the engine must be started in the normal way before ERS can be re-used.

The optional ERS function is available on most cars with automatic gearbox.

NOTE

The service life of the remote control key's battery is affected by the ERS function. In the event of frequent use of ERS the bat- tery should therefore be changed once per year, see Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery (p. 161).

NOTE

Follow local/national rules/regulations on idling.

WARNING

To remote-start the engine, the following criteria must be met:

The car must be supervised.

There must be no people or animals inside the car.

The car must not be parked in a closed, unventilated area - the exhaust gases may seriously injure humans and animals.

Related information Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 254)

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes- sages (p. 256)

Remote start (ERS) - operation

The key's buttons for remote start.

Unlocking

Locking

Approach light duration

Unlocking, tailgate

Information5

Remote starting the engine To be able to remotely start the engine, the car must be locked.

Proceed as follows:

5 Only on PCC key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 158).

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

1. Briefly press on the key's button (2). 2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a

long press - at least 2 seconds - on button (3).

If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the following takes place:

1. The direction indicators flash quickly sev- eral times.

2. The engine starts. 3. The direction indicators illuminate with a

constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that the engine has started.

NOTE

After remote starting, the car continues to be locked but with deactivated movement detector*.

With PCC6 key The light indication for Approach lighting7 flashes several times when the button is pressed and then goes to constant glow if all criteria for

ERS have been fulfilled. However, this does not mean that ERS has started the engine.

To check whether ERS has started the engine, the user can press the button (5) - if the engine has started, there is a light indica- tion by the buttons (2) and (3).

Active functions The following functions are activated with a remote started engine:

Ventilation system

Audio/video system

Approach light duration.

Deactivated functions The following functions are deactivated with a remote started engine:

Headlamps

Position lamps

Number plate lighting

Windscreen wiper.

ERS is interrupted The following steps switch off an ERS-started engine:

The remote control key's button (1), (2) or (4) is depressed

The car is unlocked

A door is opened

Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is depressed

The gear selector is moved out of P posi- tion

There is approx.10 litres left in the fuel tank

Active ERS time exceeds 15 minutes.

When an ERS-started engine is switched off, the direction indicators illuminate with a con- stant glow for 3 seconds.

Related information Remote start (ERS)* (p. 254)

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes- sages (p. 256)

6 For more information on the PCC key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 158). 7 For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 156) and Approach light duration (p. 91).

08 Starting and driving

08

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages

In situations where the ERS function fails or is interrupted, a symbol is shown in the com- bined instrument panel, supplemented by an explanatory text message.

ERS function unavailable

Message Specification

No remote start Max 2 starts

ERS unavailable because a maximum of 2 ERS activations in succession are allowed.

No remote start low fuel level

ERS unavailable because fuel level too low.

No remote start gear not in P

ERS unavailable because gear selector is not in P position.

No remote start driver in car

ERS unavailable because someone is in the pas- senger compartment.

No remote start low bat- tery

ERS unavailable due to low battery voltage. Charge the battery by starting the engine.

Message Specification

No remote start engine warning

ERS unavailable due to warning message from engine. Contact a work- shopA.

No remote start engine coolant

ERS unavailable due to error message from cool- ing system, see Coolant - level (p. 333).

No remote start door open

ERS unavailable because a door/tailgate was not closed.

No remote start car not locked

ERS unavailable because the car was not locked.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Interrupted ERS function

Message Specification

Remote start off low fuel level

ERS interrupted because fuel level too low.

Remote start off gear not in P

ERS interrupted because gear selector is not in P position.

Message Specification

Remote start off driver in car

ERS interrupted because someone is in the passenger compart- ment.

Remote start off engine warning

ERS interrupted due to error message from engine. Contact a work- shopA.

Remote start off low battery

ERS interrupted because battery voltage too low.

Remote start off engine coolant

ERS interrupted due to error message from cooling system.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Remote start (ERS)* (p. 254)

Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 254)

08 Starting and driving

08

257

Jump starting with battery If the starter battery (p. 345) is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short cir- cuits or other damage:

1. Insert the remote control key in key posi- tion 0 (p. 71).

2. Check that the donor battery has a volt- age of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover, see Starter battery - replacement (p. 347).

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).

8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump

lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead!

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 252)

08 Starting and driving

08

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Gearboxes There are two main types of gearbox. Manual gearbox and automatic gearbox.

Manual gearbox (p. 258)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 259) and Powershift (p. 263)

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol is illumi- nated in the combined instrument panel in conjunction with a text message being shown. Follow the recommendation given in the text message.

Related information Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p.

259)

Manual gearbox The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions - reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa- tions.

Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi- bility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N before moving it to R position.

Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.

NOTE

With the upper variant of the shifting pat- tern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustration) - first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear.

Related information Gearboxes (p. 258)

Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. 383)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear. An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time.

Manual gearbox Gear shift indicator for man- ual gearbox. Only one marker is illuminated at a time - during normal driving it is only illuminated in the centre.

When gearing up/down as recommended, the upper one is illuminated at +" or the lower at "-", marked red in the illustration.

Automatic gearbox

Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear shift indicator.

An indicator is available as an aid on some variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump- tion. However, taking into consideration cha- racteristics such as performance and vibra- tion-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed. The framed number indicates the current gear.

With "Analogue" combined instrument panel, the gear positions and indicator arrows are shown in the instrument's centre.

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear modes - Automatic and Manual.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S8: Sport mode*.

Combined instrument panel (p. 60) shows the position of the gear selector using the follow- ing indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Gear positions Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the combined instrument panel. (Only one marker is illumi- nated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)

Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active.

Parking position - P Select position P when starting the engine or when the car is parked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from P-position, the brake pedal must first be depressed firmly.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake (p. 281), as a precaution.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when posi- tion P is selected.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic trans- mission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

Reverse position - R The car must be stationary when R position is selected.

Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position.

Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to D position from R position.

Geartronic Manual gear positions (+S-) The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

The manual gear position is reached by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+S-". The combined instrument

panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are displayed in a box, corresponding to the gear that has just been selected.

Move the lever forwards towards "+" (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position between + and .

or

Pull the lever back towards "" (minus) to change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode "+S" can be selected at any time while driving.

8 The "Sport mode" function is not available in a V60 Plug-in Hybrid - only "+" and "-".

08 Starting and driving

08

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

Move the lever to the side to the end position at D.

NOTE

If the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the gear selector has been moved forwards or backwards in its "+S" posi- tion. The combined instrument panel then changes indication from S to show which of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.

Paddles* As a supplement to manual gear changing with the gear selector there are also controls located on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles".

To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is by means of pulling one of the paddles toward the steering wheel - the combined instrument panel then changes indication from "D" to a figure, which indicates the cur- rent gear.

To then change gear one step:

Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release.

Both steering wheel "paddles".

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

A gear change occurs at each pull of the pad- dle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range.

After each gear change the combined instru- ment panel changes figure to show the cur- rent gear.

NOTE

Automatic deactivation

If the steering wheel paddles are not used then they are deactivated after a short time - this is indicated when the combined instrument panel switches indication, from the figure for the current gear back to "D".

The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated as long as engine braking is in progress.

Manual deactivation

The steering wheel paddle shifters can also be deactivated manually:

Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel and hold until the combined instrument panel changes character from the figure for the current gear to "D".

The paddles can also be used with the gear selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are constantly activated without being deacti- vated.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)9 The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more

quickly to acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.

To activate Sport mode:

Move the gear selector to the side from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indi- cation from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instru- ment panel changes indication from D to the figure 110.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the dis- play shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate care- fully.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear- box control program has a protective down- shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/ kick-down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depend- ing on engine speed. The car changes up

when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Related information Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.

383)

9 With some engines only. 10 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

08 Starting and driving

08

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* An automatic gearbox with Powershift differs from an automatic gearbox with Geartronic (p. 259), in that it has double mechanical clutch discs.

D: Automatic gear positions. +S: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.

The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits the motive force from the engine to the drive wheels with double mechanical clutch discs, as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses a hydraulic torque converter.

Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission. One exception is Geartronic's Winter mode, see the section "Geartronic - Winter mode" (p.

259). Powershift enables driving away on a slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually instead of 3rd gear (Geartronic).

Powershift or Geartronic The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift trans- mission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the bonnet - see Type designations (p. 370). The designation MPS6 means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.

To bear in mind The transmission's double clutch has over- load protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.

Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the combined instrument panel shows a message. The transmission

can also overheat during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradi- ent, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages:

Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead, drive for- ward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car station- ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gear- box could then overheat.

For important information regarding Power- shift transmission and towing, see Towing (p. 301).

Text message and action In some situations the combined instrument panel may show a text message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

264

Symbol Message Driving characteristics Action

Transm. overheat brake to hold

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.

Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brake.A

Transm. overheat park safely

Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A

Transm. cooling let engine run

No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the text message, the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions in the text message where appropriate.

NOTE

The examples in the table are no indication of the car being defective, but show that a safety function has been activated with a view to preventing damage to any of the car's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm. overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporar- ily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox tem- perature has cooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible text messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 104).

A text message extinguishes automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button.

08 Starting and driving

08

}} 265

Gear selector inhibitor There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 0 2 1 3 5 1

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P) To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in key position II (p. 71).

Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in key position II.

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and locate a hole11 for the key blade (p. 160) in the bottom of the compartment.

Search for a spring-loaded button down in the hole with the key blade; depress the button with the blade and hold.

Move the gear selector from the P posi- tion and pull up the key blade.

4. Set the rubber mat back in place.

11 There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259)

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 263)

Hill start assist (HSA)*12

The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the car does not roll backwards.

The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler- ates.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to con- tinue.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- poration's core values which guides all our activities. This target orientation has resulted in several separate energy-saving functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.

General information about Start/Stop

The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and cleaner.

12 Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267

The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop auto- matically, whenever appropriate.

Manual or Automatic

Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.

Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.

267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

Start/Stop* - function and operation Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key.

The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is made aware of this by the func- tion's symbol illuminating in the combined instrument panel and the On/Off button lamp illuminating.

All of the car's normal sys- tems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as nor- mal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.

Engine auto-stop The following is required for the engine to auto-stop:

Conditions M/A A

Declutch, set the gear lever in neu- tral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automati- cally.

M

Stop the car with the foot brake, and then keep your foot on the pedal - the engine auto-stops.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If the ECO function is acti- vated then the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.

As verification and reminder that the engine is auto-stopped the com- bined instrument panel's symbol for the Start/Stop function illuminates.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine auto-start

Conditions M/ AA

With the gear lever in neutral posi- tion:

1. Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.

2. Engage a suitable gear and drive.

M

Release the foot pressure on the foot brake - the engine auto-starts and the journey can continue.

A

Maintain foot pressure on the foot brake and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts.

A

The following option is also availa- ble on a downhill gradient:

Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.

M + A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Deactivate the Start/Stop function In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out with a push of this button.

Disengaged function is indicated by the combined instrument panel's Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off button's lamp extinguishing.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.

Start assistance HSA The foot brake can also be released on an uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA (p. 266) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents the car from rolling backwards.

HSA means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily available while the driver moves his/her foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine having stopped automatically. The temporary braking effect releases after a few seconds or when the driver depresses the accelerator pedal.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not always stop automatically.

The engine does not auto-stop if:

Conditions M/AA

the car has not first reached approx. 8 km/h after a key start or the last auto-stop.

M + A

the driver has unbuckled the seat- belt.

M + A

battery capacity is below the mini- mum permitted level.

M + A

the engine does not have normal operating temperature.

M + A

outside temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 30 C.

M + A

the windscreen's electric heating is activated.

M + A

Conditions M/AA

the environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset values - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.

M + A

the car is reversed. M + A

the starter battery temperature is below the freezing point or is too high.

M + A

the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.

M + A

the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily disen- gaged Start/Stop function is reac- tivated as soon as an automatic cleaning cycle has been per- formed (see Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 292)).

M + A

the road is very steep. M + A

a trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.

M + A

the bonnet has been openedB. M + A

the gearbox does not have normal operating temperature.

A

Conditions M/AA

the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500-2500 metres above sea level - the cur- rent air pressure varies with the prevailing weather conditions.

A

adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated.

A

the gear selector is in S positionC

or "+/-". A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B With certain engines only. C Sport mode.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

08 Starting and driving

08

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue.

In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):

Conditions M/AA

Misting forms on the windows. M + A

The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset values.

M + A

There is a temporarily high current take-off or battery capacity drops below the minimum permitted level.

M + A

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

M + A

The bonnet is openedB. M + A

Conditions M/AA

The car starts to move, or increa- ses speed slightly if the car auto- stopped without being fully sta- tionary.

M + A

The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position.

A

Steering wheel movementsB. A

The gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionC, R or "+/-".

A

The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message inform that the Start/Stop function is active.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B With certain engines only. C Sport mode.

WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First switch off the engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The engine does not always auto-start after having auto-stop- ped.

In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:

Conditions M/ AA

A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable auto-start.

M

The driver is unrestrained, the gear selector is in P position and the drivers door is open - a normal engine start must take place.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. In the event that a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed in accordance with the below:

1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.

2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

08 Starting and driving

08

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/Stop* - settings Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The car's MY CAR menu system, under the DRIVe heading, con- tains information about Volvo's Start-Stop system, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driving techniques.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 273)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

08 Starting and driving

08

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages The Start/Stop function can show text mes- sages on the information display.

Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may show text messages in the com-

bined instrument panel for certain situations.

For some of them there is a recommended action that should be performed. The follow- ing table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Info/action M/AA

Auto Start-Stop serv. required

Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

M + A

Autostart Engine running + acoustic signal

Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector is in D position.

A

Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

M + A

Depress clutch pedal to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Press brake and clutch to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Info/action M/AA

Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

A

Press Start button The engine will not auto-start - start the engine normally with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If a message does not go out following com- pletion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 266)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 267)

Starting the engine (p. 252)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 272)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 271)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 270)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 269)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 271)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

08 Starting and driving

08

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275

ECO* ECO is an innovative Volvo function for auto- matic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel consumption by up to 5%, depending on the driver's driving style. The function gives the driver the option of a more active environ- mentally conscious way of driving.

General The following are changed upon activation of the ECO function:

Gearbox gearshift points.

Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal.

Start/Stop function - the engine can also auto-stop before the car has stopped to being fully stationary.

The Eco Coast function is activated - engine braking ceases.

Climate control system settings - some electricity consumers are deactivated or operate at reduced power.

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, sev- eral parameters in the climate control sys- tem's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced - a press of the AC button resets the cli- mate control system, but then with reduced AC function.

ECO - Operation

ECO On/Off

ECO symbol

The ECO function is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. There are exceptions for certain engines. However, it is easily verified by means of both the combined instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp illuminating when the function is activated.

ECO function On or Off Disengaged ECO function is indicated by the combined instrument panel ECO sym- bol and the ECO button lamp extinguishing. The function is then switched off until it is reactivated with the ECO button.

Eco Coast - Function The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to coast for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with minimum consumption.

This function is intended for use in the event of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to roll forward to an intersection or a red light.

Eco Coast enables proactive driving where the driver can use the so-called "Pulse & Glide" technique and a minimum of braking.

Combination On and Off

A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily deactivated ECO function can also collec- tively contribute to reduced consumption. Accordingly:

Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without engine braking = Low consumption

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

276

and

Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting with engine braking = Minimum con- sumption.

NOTE

However, to achieve optimal low fuel con- sumption, Eco Coast in combination with short coasting distances should generally be avoided.

Activate Eco Coast The function is activated when the accelera- tor pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:

The ECO button activated

The gear selector in D position

Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h

The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%.

Deactivate Eco Coast In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples of such situations include:

on steep downhill gradients - to be able to use engine braking.

before an imminent overtaking manoeu- vre - in order to be able to complete it in the safest way possible.

Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine braking can be performed as follows:

Press the ECO button.

Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-" position.

Change gear with the steering wheel pad- dle shifters.

Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.

Eco Coast - Limitations The function is not available if:

cruise control is activated

the road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6%.

manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddle shifters*

engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature.

the gear selector is moved from D- to "S +/-" position

speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h

More information and settings

The car's menu system MY CAR contains further information on the ECO concept - see the section MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information General information on climate control (p.

118)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277

All Wheel Drive - AWD* The best traction possible is achieved with all- wheel drive.

All Wheel Drive is always available

All Wheel Drive (All Wheel Drive) means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time.

The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An elec- tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This pro- vides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)* HDC can be compared to an automatic engine brake. When you release the accelera- tor on downhill gradients the car is normally braked by means of the engine striving for low engine idling speeds, so-called engine brak- ing. But the steeper the road and the more load there is in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine braking. In order to then reduce speed the driver has to assist using the foot brake.

WARNING

HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

HDC makes it possible to increase/reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake. The sensitivity of the accelerator pedal decreases and becomes more precise by means of the full actuation of the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine speed within a limited range. The brake sys- tem brakes itself and provides the car with a low and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully focus on steering.

HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients with an uneven road surface and slippery

sections. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer from a ramp.

Function

HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the func- tion is switched on.

When HDC is operating this symbol illuminates and the combined instru-

ment panel shows Hill descent control ON.

The function only operates with gear 1 or reverse gear R - with automatic gearbox the combined instrument panel then shows the character 1 or R, see Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259).

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

278

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated on an automatic gearbox when the gear selector is in posi- tion D.

Operation HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within the gear's speed register can be selected using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to 10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the hill's gradient and without the need for the foot brake.

The brake lights come on automatically when the function is operating. The driver can brake or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake.

HDC is deactivated:

with the on/off button on the centre con- sole

if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox

if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector is moved to position D.

The function can be disengaged at any time. If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly, but slowly instead.

NOTE

With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activa- tion and engine response.

Foot brake The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed while driving.

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and higher pedal pressure is needed to produce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 379).

Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. With wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking

08 Starting and driving

08

279

and after the car has been washed, it is advisable to carry out cleaning by braking gently for a short period while driving.

Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Book- let.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's compo- nents must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols and messages

Symbol Specification

Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake sys- tem.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake sys- tem checked - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Related information Parking brake (p. 281)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 280)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 280)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 279)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.

The function allows steering ability to be maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.

A short test of the ABS system is made auto- matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.

Related information Foot brake (p. 278)

Parking brake (p. 281)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 280)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 280)

08 Starting and driving

08

280

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the hazard warning flashers (p. 88) are activated, and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button.

Related information Foot brake (p. 278)

Parking brake (p. 281)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 280)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 279)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force and so reduce the braking distance.

EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases the braking force when necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as neces- sary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Related information Foot brake (p. 278)

Parking brake (p. 281)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 280)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 279)

08 Starting and driving

08

}} 281

Parking brake The parking brake holds the car stationary, when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani- cally locking/blocking two wheels.

Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrical parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the park- ing brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.

Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the park- ing brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting with battery (p. 257).

Applying the parking brake

Parking brake control - apply.

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL RELEASE. > The combined instrument pan-

el's symbol starts flashing - once there is a constant glow the parking brake is applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

Emergency brake In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is in motion by

pressing and holding the control for PUSH LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking proce- dure is stopped when the control is released.

NOTE

In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the braking procedure.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis- sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

282

Disengaging the parking brake

Parking brake control - release.

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch.13

2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

3. Pull the control PUSH LOCK/PULL RELEASE. > The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym- bol extinguishes.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- mends that the brake pedal is used.

Releasing automatically 1. Start the engine.

2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.

3. Ease up the clutch and depress the accelerator. > The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym- bol extinguishes.

Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch13.

2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

3. Pull the control. > The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym- bol extinguishes.

Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

4. Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator. > The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym- bol extinguishes.

NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seat- belt. The parking brake is released imme- diately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by depressing the control while driving off. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

13 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.

08 Starting and driving

08

}} 283

Symbols and messages For information on how the combined instru- ment panel's text messages can be shown

and deleted, see Messages - handling (p. 105).

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

"Message" Read the message in the combined instrument panel.

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.

Read the message in the combined instrument panel.

Park brake not fully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:

Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

284

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Parking brake not applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:

Try to release and apply the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.

Parking brake Service required

A fault has arisen:

Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the car has to be parked before a pos- sible fault has been rectified, then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gear- box) or the gear selector must be in posi- tion P (automatic gearbox).

A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direc- tion indicator stalk.

Related information Foot brake (p. 278)

08 Starting and driving

08

285

Fording Fording means that the car is driven through a water-covered roadway. Fording must be car- ried out with great caution.

The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.

In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.

Related information Recovery (p. 303)

Towing (p. 301)

Overheating Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driv- ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. 294).

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel's information display and a text message High engine temp Stop safely is shown there - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down.

If the text message High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated which, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel, and its display shows the text message Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling

08 Starting and driving

08

286

speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gearbox to cool down.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Driving with open tailgate When driving with the tailgate open, toxic exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car through the cargo area.

WARNING

Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 145)

Overload - starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery (p. 345) to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position (p. 71) II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use func- tions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

headlamps

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume).

If the starter battery voltage is low then the combined instrument panel's information dis- play shows the text Low battery Power save mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces cer- tain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the battery by star- ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than run- ning the engine at idling speed while sta- tionary.

08 Starting and driving

08

287

Before a long journey Before a long journey, it makes good sense to go through the following points:

Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption (p. 387) is nor- mal.

Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).

Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

Carrying a warning triangle (p. 316) is a legal requirement in certain countries.

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330)

Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 312)

Lamp replacement (p. 336)

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks in order to ensure that the car can be driven safely.

Check the following in particular before the cold season:

The engine coolant (p. 333) must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To achieve opti- mum antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre- vent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 379).

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the

starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid (p. 345) to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal require- ment in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

08 Starting and driving

08

288

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as follows:

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is released.

In the combined instrument panel's display the arrow on the symbol indi-

cates which side of the car the fuel cap is located.

Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a click confirms that it is closed.

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 288)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible.

1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate the green cord with handle.

2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".

IMPORTANT

Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 288)

Filling up with fuel Important things to consider when refuelling.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures. Open the cap slowly.

After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard.

Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the

pump nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

08 Starting and driving

08

289

Filling with a fuel can14

When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. The funnel is located by the spare wheel or in the well under the floor hatch.

Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an open- able cap and the funnel's pipe must be moved past the cap before filling can begin.

Related information Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 288)

Fuel - handling (p. 289)

Fuel - handling Fuel of a lower quality than that recom- mended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- ting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and die- sel are highly toxic and could cause per- manent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Economical driving (p. 293)

Fuel - diesel (p. 290)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 292)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 386)

14 Only applies to cars with diesel engine.

08 Starting and driving

08

290

Fuel - petrol Petrol is used as fuel.

Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should 91 RON be used.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consump- tion.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic con- verter.

Do not use additives not recom- mended by Volvo.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 289)

Economical driving (p. 293)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 386)

Fuel - diesel Diesel is used as fuel.

Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc- ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Die- sel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for exam- ple.

At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a par- affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

Special additives

Marine diesel fuel

Heating oil

FAME15 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch and push it in to the end posi-

15 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.

08 Starting and driving

08

291

tion, see Key positions (p. 71) for more information.

2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.

3. Wait approx. 1 minute. 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake

and/or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.

NOTE

Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:

Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel. For more information, see Volvo service programme (p. 324).

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 289)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 292)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387)

Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata- lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy (see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387)).

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con- tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient com- bustion, and together with the three-way cat- alytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

292 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Economical driving (p. 293)

Fuel - petrol (p. 290)

Fuel - diesel (p. 290)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission con- trol.

The particles in the exhaust gases are collec- ted in the filter during normal driving. So- called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached nor- mal operating temperature.

Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur- ing regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approx. 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in the combined instrument panel, and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in its information display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or

motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

The following may arise during regenera- tion:

a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily

fuel consumption may increase tem- porarily

a smell of burning may arise.

When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating tem- perature more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter is completely filled with parti- cles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 289)

Fuel - diesel (p. 290)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 386)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293

Economical driving Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv- ing style and speed to the prevailing condi- tions.

For lowest fuel consumption, activate ECO (p. 275)*16.

Use the ECO Guide which indicates how fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 64).

Drive in the highest gear possible, adap- ted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator (p. 259).

Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.

High speed results in increased fuel con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.

Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390).

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.

Avoid driving with open windows.

For information about Volvo Car Corpora- tion's environmental philosophy, see Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p. 19).

For more information about fuel consumption, see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387).

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates impor- tant systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 289)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 387)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 386)

16 Only applies to cars with automatic gearbox.

08 Starting and driving

08

294 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer there are a number of important points to think about regarding e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 374).

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket com- plies with the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see Tyres - air pressure (p. 315).

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi- cators are broken, then the combined instru- ment panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes faster than normal and the information display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp trailer text is shown.

Level control* The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.

Trailer weights For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see Towing capacity and towball load (p. 375).

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

08 Starting and driving

08

295

Related information Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox (p.

295)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox (p. 295)

Towing bracket/Towbar (p. 296)

Lamp replacement (p. 336)

Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheat- ing.

Do not run the engine at higher revolu- tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.

Diesel engine 5-cyl In the event of a risk of overheating the

optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 294)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

An automatic gearbox selects the opti- mum gear related to load and engine speed.

In the event of overheating a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel with a message that is shown in the information display - follow the recommendation given.

Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic transmission in

a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revo- lutions.

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.

Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

See also the specific information on slow driving with a trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission, see Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 263).

Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

Related information Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 259)

Towing bracket/Towbar A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.

If the car is equipped with a detachable/ removable towbar, the installation instruc- tions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see Detachable towbar - attach- ment/removal (p. 297).

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the installation instructions carefully.

The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks The towbar's towball must be cleaned

and greased regularly.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 294)

Detachable towbar - storage Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.

G 0 3 1 7 1 3

Towbar storage space.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

Related information Detachable towbar - specifications (p.

297)

Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p. 297)

Driving with a trailer (p. 294)

08 Starting and driving

08

297

Detachable towbar - specifications Specifications for detachable towbar.

Specifications

G 0 2 1 4 8 5 Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 1036

B 111

C 855

D 428

E 109

F 326

G Side member

H Ball centre

Related information Detachable towbar - attachment/removal

(p. 297)

Detachable towbar - storage (p. 296)

Driving with a trailer (p. 294)

Detachable towbar - attachment/ removal The attachment/removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:

Attaching

Remove the protective cover by first turn- ing the screws a quarter turn . Then slide the cover diagonally downward and forward in order to release and finally pull it backwards to remove it .

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

298

G 0 2 1 4 8 7

Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.

G 0 2 1 4 8 8

The indicator window must show red.

G 0 2 1 4 8 9

Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

G 0 2 1 4 9 0

The indicator window must show green.

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.

08 Starting and driving

08

}} 299

G 0 2 1 4 9 4

Check that the towbar is secure by pull- ing it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.

G 0 2 1 4 9 5

Safety cable.

WARNING

Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.

Removing the towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.

Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see Detachable towbar - storage (p. 296).

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

300

Refit the protective cover by wedging the cover's hooks into the bumper's rear edge. Push the cover upward until the bolts are in the correct position . Finally, turn the bolts a quarter turn so that the cover is attached. It is important that the handle of the bolts is set trans- versely during assembly.

Related information Detachable towbar - storage (p. 296)

Detachable towbar - specifications (p. 297)

Driving with a trailer (p. 294)

Trailer stabiliser - TSA17

The trailer stability assist (TSA - Trailer Stability Assist) function is designed to stabi- lise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.

The trailer stability assist is included in the stability and traction control system (p. 178) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability and Traction Control).

Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example,

end up in the wrong lane or leave the car- riageway.

The trailer stability assist continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time the trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. For more information, see Stability and trac- tion control system (DSTC) - operation (p. 179)

Miscellaneous The trailer stability assist can engage within the speed interval 60-160 km/h.

NOTE

TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) (p. 178).

17 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.

08 Starting and driving

08

301

The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the driver uses sudden steering wheel move- ments to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.

When the trailer stability assist is working, the combined instrument

panel's DSTC symbol flashes.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 181)

Towing During towing, one vehicle is towed by another vehicle using a tow rope.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Do not tow the vehicle at speeds higher than 80 km/h or for distances in excess of 80 km.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins.

1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/ STOP ENGINE button - key position II is activated, see Key positions (p. 71) for more information about key positions.

2. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.

The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steer- ing is considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Prior to towing:

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Powershift The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

302

lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift trans- mission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the bonnet, see Type designations (p. 370). The designation MPS6 means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels roll- ing forward.

In the event of moving a longer dis- tance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recommended.

Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the battery is dis- charged and the engine does not start, see Jump starting with battery (p. 257).

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.

Related information Towing eye (p. 302)

Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

Attaching the towing eye

Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area - in some cases it may be hidden under the sill.

08 Starting and driving

08

303

The cover for the towing eye's attach- ment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:

Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.

The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat- form. The car's position and ground clear- ance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be dam- aged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi- cle's lifting device if necessary.

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

Related information Towing (p. 301)

Recovery (p. 303)

Recovery Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor- ted away by means of another vehicle.

Call a recovery service for recovery assis- tance.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat- form. The car's position and ground clear- ance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be dam- aged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi- cle's lifting device if necessary.

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

304

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transpor- ted with the wheels rolling forward.

An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.

Related information Towing (p. 301)

WHEELS AND TYRES

09 Wheels and tyres

09

306

Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

G 0 2 1 7 7 8

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 390).

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 311)

Tyres - load index (p. 311)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 308)

Tyres - maintenance Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.

Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indi- cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

307

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the fric- tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri- orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manu- facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.

Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Wear and maintenance Correct tyre pressure (p. 315) results in more even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli- mate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to cor- rect than oversteer, and leads to the car con- tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hang- ing up - and not standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 311)

Tyres - load index (p. 311)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 308)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tyres - tread wear indicators A tread wear indicator shows the status of the tyre's tread.

G 0 2 1 8 2 9

Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 311)

Tyres - load index (p. 311)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)

Wheel bolts Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the hubs and are available in different ver- sions.

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces- sories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel bolts* Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.

Related information Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 310)

Tools Amongst other things, the car contains towing eye, jack* and wheel bolt wrench*.

Located under the cargo area floor are the car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is also space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Towing eye (p. 302)

Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 312)

Wheel bolts (p. 308)

Jack* (p. 309)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309

Jack* A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when changing the tyres.

The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must always be well greased.

Tools - returning into place

The tools and jack* must be returned to their correct places after use. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.

The foam block and spare wheel are replaced in the reverse order to taking out.

Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam block. It must point forwards in the car.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

Related information Warning triangle (p. 316)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Winter tyres Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter road conditions.

Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend- ent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

310

Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an acci- dent.

IMPORTANT

Only single-sided snow chains are permit- ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or similar that are properly suited to the car model, tyre size and wheel rim size. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

312)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below.

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that certain combinations of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.

Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.

7 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

16 Rim diameter in inches

50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390)

Tyres - dimensions The car's wheels (wheel rims) and tyres have a certain dimension, see the examples in the table below.

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that certain combinations of wheels (wheel rims) and tyres are approved.

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation: 235/60 R18 103 V.

235 Tyre width (mm)

60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

18 Rim diameter in inches

103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)

V Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 240 km/h.)

Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 311)

Tyres - load index (p. 311)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

311

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 310) Tyres - load index Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a certain load.

Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter- mines the load capacity required of the tyres. Minimum permissible index is indicated in the load index table.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 311)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)

Tyres - speed ratings Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed and therefore belongs to a particular speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).

Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rat- ing is indicated in the speed rating table below. The only exception to these regula- tions is the winter tyre (p. 309)1, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maxi- mum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations deter- mine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is speci- fied in the table.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

1 Both metal-studded and studless tyres.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

WARNING

The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (p. 311) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than speci- fied. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - load index (p. 311)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)

Changing wheels - removing wheels The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. win- ter wheels/winter tyres.

Spare wheel* The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accord- ingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be discon- nected. The spare wheel must not be repaired.

The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 390).

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and

the foam block. The foam block contains all the tools needed to change the wheels.

Taking out the spare wheel 1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear

and forwards.

2. Undo the retaining screw.

3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

Removing Set up warning triangle (p. 316) if a wheel is replaced in trafficked location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.

1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 281) and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maxi- mum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and removal tool for wheel covers* located under the cargo floor in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see Raising the car (p. 325).

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground to prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for exam- ple.

4. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* until the stop position in accordance with the following figure.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench.

5. Loosen the wheel bolts -1 turn anti- clockwise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

6. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground.

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

7.

Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as illustrated and that the foot is posi- tioned vertically under the anchorage.

IMPORTANT

The jacking point is the rearmost of the two rear recesses.

8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

Related information Changing wheels - fitting (p. 314)

Jack* (p. 309)

Warning triangle (p. 316)

Wheel bolts (p. 308)

Changing wheels - fitting It is important that the procedure for fitting the wheel is carried out correctly.

Fitting 1. Clean the contact surfaces between

wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tight- ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

5. Refit any full wheel covers.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Park the car such that passengers have the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between themselves and the roadway.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315

NOTE

The car's regular jack is designed only for use occasionally and for a short time, such as when changing a wheel with a punc- tured tyre, switching between summer tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

312)

Jack* (p. 309)

Warning triangle (p. 316)

Wheel bolts (p. 308)

Tyres - air pressure Tyres can have different air pressures which are measured in bar.

Check the air pressure in the tyres The tyre pressures must be checked every month.

This also applies to the car's spare wheel.

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre dimension

ECO pressure2

Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary Spare)

NOTE

Check the tyre pressure when the tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that the tyres are at the same temperature as the outdoor temperature. The tyres will heat up and the tyre pressures will increase after driving for a few kilome- tres.

Tyre pressures which are too low will increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre service life and impair the car's han- dling. Driving with tyre pressures which are too low may lead to the tyres overheating and sustaining dam- age. Tyre pressures affect ride com- fort, road noise and steering.

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

2 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

316

Tyre pressure label

G 0 2 1 8 3 0

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390).

Fuel economy, ECO pressure In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is recommended (applies to both full and light load), see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390).

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 311)

Tyres - load index (p. 311)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 308)

Warning triangle The warning triangle is used to warn other road users of a stationary vehicle.

Storage and folding up

Lift the floor hatch and take out the warn- ing triangle.

Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warn- ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

First aid kit* The first aid box contains first aid equipment.

A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area.

Emergency puncture repair* Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 390).

The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 318) consists of a compressor and a bottle of seal- ant. The sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emer- gency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets. Choose the socket that is nearest to the punctured tyre.

IMPORTANT

If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sock- ets (p. 144) in the tunnel console then no other current consumer may be connected to the other one.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation

(p. 319)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 321)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 318)

Tools (p. 308)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency puncture repair kit* - location Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pres- sure (p. 390).

Location of the emergency puncture repair kit

The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area.

Set up the warning triangle (p. 316) if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

IMPORTANT

If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sock- ets (p. 144) in the tunnel console then no other current consumer may be connected to the other one.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview

(p. 318)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant (p. 322)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 390).

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit* - location

(p. 318)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant (p. 322)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Emergency puncture repair* - operation Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 390).

Emergency puncture repair

For information on the function of the parts, see Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 318).

1. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed (which is fitted on one side of the compressor) and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Screw the bottle into its holder.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Connect the hose from the compressor to the valve.

6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.

NOTE

If the compressor is connected to one of the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel con- sole, no other current consumer must be connected to the other one.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Flick the switch to position I.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact- ing an authorised tyre centre is recom- mended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini- mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.

11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.

12. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 321)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 318)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 390).

Check tyre pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

If it is below 1.3 bar3 then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar3, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390). Release air using the pressure reduc- ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

3. Make sure the compressor is switched off. Detach the air hose and cable.

Fit the valve cap.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- est authorised Volvo workshop for the

replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Emergency puncture repair* - operation (p. 319)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 318)

3 1 bar = 100 kPa.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency puncture repair kit* - inflating the tyres The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 318).

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 390). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

6. Switch off the compressor Detach the air hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 318)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 321)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant The container (bottle) with the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 318) contains sealant and it can be replaced.

Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu- ral rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 317)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

10 Maintenance and service

10

324

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 336)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 325

Raising the car When raising the car it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recom- mended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

326

Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).

If the car is raised with a front workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the four lifting points furthest in under the car. If the car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be positioned under the outer lifting points (jack- ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can be used at the front.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

312)

10 Maintenance and service

10

327

Bonnet - opening and closing The bonnet can be opened when the handle by the pedals has been pulled backwards, and the lock by the grille has been moved to the left.

G 0 3 1 9 1 1

Pull the handle by the pedals. An informa- tion symbol lights when the bonnet is open, see Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65).

Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille, see illustration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Related information Engine compartment - checking (p. 329)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 327)

Engine compartment - overview The overview shows normal checking points.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

328

Engine compartment 4 cyl. 2.0 l1

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on engine variant.

Filling engine oil

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Radiator

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Filling washer fluid

Air filter

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri- cal system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.

Engine compartment except 4 cyl. 2.0 l2

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick3

Radiator

Filling engine oil

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Filling washer fluid

Air filter

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri- cal system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 327)

Engine compartment - checking (p. 329)

1 Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the following heading "Engine compartment except 4-cyl. 2.0 l". 2 Also applies to the B4204T7 engine. 3 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

10 Maintenance and service

10

329

Engine compartment - checking Some oils and fluids should be checked at regular intervals.

Regular checking Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

Coolant

Engine oil

Power steering fluid

Washer fluid

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automati- cally some after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 327)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 327)

Coolant - level (p. 333)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330)

Power steering fluid - level (p. 335)

Washer fluid - filling (p. 345)

Engine oil - general An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied.

Volvo recommends:

When driving under adverse conditions, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 379).

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the combined instrument panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the instru- ment's warning symbol and display

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

330

texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ance with the intervals specified in the Serv- ice and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 379).

For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 380).

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330)

Engine oil - checking and filling The oil level is checked on certain engine vari- ants with the electronic oil level sensor, on other engine variants with the oil dipstick.

Engine with oil dipstick4

G 0 2 1 7 3 4

Dipstick and filler pipe.

Checking the oil level in a new car is espe- cially important before the first scheduled oil change.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure- ments are made on a cold engine before star- ting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.

G 0 2 1 7 3 7

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Measurement and filling if required 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switch-

ing off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.

3. Re-insert the dipstick.

4. Pull it out and check the level.

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres should be added. If the level is signifi- cantly below, then an additional amount is required.

6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1-4.

4 Does not apply to the 4-cyl. 2.0 litre or 5-cyl. diesel, which have electronic oil level sensor. However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 331

WARNING

Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.

Engine with electronic oil level sensor, 4-cyl. 2.0 l5

Filler pipe.6

You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.

Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand the analogue.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103).

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

If notified of low oil level, only fill with the volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km and have been stationary for 2 hours with the engine switched off and on level ground before oil level indication is correct.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.

Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl. 2.0 l If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

5 Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the earlier heading "Engine with oil dipstick". 6 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

332

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

For more information on menu naviga- tion, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103).

NOTE

If the right conditions for measuring the oil level are not met (time after engine shut- down, the car's inclination, outside tem- perature, etc.) then the message Not available will be shown. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.

Engine with electronic oil level sensor, 5-cyl. diesel

Filler pipe.7

You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.

Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand the analogue.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103).

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

7 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

10 Maintenance and service

10

333

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.

WARNING

Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.

Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

For more information on menu naviga- tion, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103).

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom- mended filling level is 4. Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digi- tal combined instrument panel and the right- hand the analogue.

Related information Engine oil - general (p. 329)

Coolant - level The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passen- ger compartment.

The coolant level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Checking the level and topping up

When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

334

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol- ume (p. 382).

Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the system is not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready- mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

Brake and clutch fluid - level Brake and clutch fluid level should be between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.

Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reser- voir. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended brake fluid grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. 385). The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, fre- quent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

10 Maintenance and service

10

335

Filling

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.

The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold zone in the engine com- partment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached.

Turn and open the cover located on the covering.

Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

Power steering fluid - level The power steering fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. The fluid does not need to be changed.

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. The cover must not be opened.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not require changing. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. For rec- ommended fluid grade, see Power steering fluid - grade (p. 385).

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steering system, or if the engine is switched off and must be towed, then the car can still be steered.

10 Maintenance and service

10

336

Climate control system - fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised work- shop.

Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluores- cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when looking for leaks.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 324)

Lamp replacement Lamp replacement can be carried out for bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.

The bulbs are specified (p. 342). The follow- ing list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised, such as LED8 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some other reason, except at a workshop:

Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon lamps)

Daytime running lights/Position/parking lamps front

Side marker lamps front

Cornering lights

Side direction indicators, door mirrors

Approach lighting, door mirrors

Interior lighting apart from Courtesy light- ing front

Glovebox lighting

Position/parking lamps rear

Side marker lamps rear

Direction indicators, rear.

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau- tion because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.

WARNING

The car's electrical system must be in key position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the bro- ken bulb has been replaced then we rec- ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

8 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

10 Maintenance and service

10

337

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Related information Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 337)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 341)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area (p. 341)

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting (p. 341)

Lamp replacement - headlamps All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. First loosen and remove the whole headlamp.

Removing the headlamp Set the car's electrical system in key position 0, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.

Pull the headlamp straight forward.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.

Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the connec- tor with your other hand.

5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

6. Replace the bulb in question.

Securing the headlamp

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

338

When securing, check that the long lock pin is engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes.

1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound should be heard.

2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins. Check that they are correctly inserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The headlamp must be mounted and the con- nector correctly installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 336)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs (p. 338)

Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by releasing the headlamp's larger cover.

Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 337).

1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are suf- ficient.)

2. Slide the cover to one side.

3. Remove the cover.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Related information Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 337)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 339)

Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 339)

Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p. 339)

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339

Lamp replacement - dipped beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 337).

2. Remove the cover (p. 338).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder downwards.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in. It can be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - main beam The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 337).

2. Remove the cover (p. 338).

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and then pulling straight out.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It can be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - extra main beam The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 337).

2. Remove the cover (p. 338).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight out.

5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the socket. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

10 Maintenance and service

10

340

Lamp replacement - direction indicators front The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the headlamp's smaller cover.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 337).

2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- clockwise.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the bulb.

4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.

6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - rear lamp Rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp and reversing lamp are replaced from inside the cargo area.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the bumper.

1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- clockwise.

2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning the bulb anticlockwise.

3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.

4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

Brake light and reversing lamp

Both the brake light and the reversing lamp bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Open the panel.

2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- clockwise.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.

5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

Related information Lamp replacement - location of rear

lamps (p. 341)

Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

10 Maintenance and service

10

341

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the rear.

Position/parking lamps (LED)/Side marker lamps (LED)

Brake lights (p. 340)

Reversing lamp (p. 340)

Indicator

Brake light (LED)

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 336)

Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting The number plate lighting is located under the tailgate handle.

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing and withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it into place.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area The cargo area lighting is located in the tail- gate.

G 0 3 1 9 4 2

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press back the lamp housing.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

10 Maintenance and service

10

342

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the lamp lenses.

Removal of lamp lens

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lock lugs on the edge.

2. Snap off the lamp lens.

3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb straight out to the side and replace with a new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could then be crushed.

Attaching the lamp lens 1. Refit the lamp lens.

2. Press it into place.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 342)

Lamps - specifications The specifications apply to bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.

Lighting WA Type

Dipped beam, halogen

55 H7 LL

Main beam, Hal- ogen

65 H9

Extra main beam, ABL

65 H9

Front direction indicators

24 PY24W

Courtesy lighting front

3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d

Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm

Vanity mirror lighting

2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d

Cargo area light- ing

10 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm

Number plate lighting

5 C5W LL

Brake lights 21 P21W LL

10 Maintenance and service

10

343

Lighting WA Type

Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL

A Watt

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 336)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 341)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 342)

Wiper blades The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving.

The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv- ice position when they are to be replaced.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to make replacement possible, to clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example), they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

1. Place the remote control key in the igni- tion lock9 and briefly press the START/ STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I. For detailed information on key positions, see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 71).

2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button again to set the cars electrical system in key position 0.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second. > The wipers then move to standing

straight up.

The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical sys- tem to key position I (or when the car is started).

9 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

344

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the wipers are allowed to return to their starting position. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Replacing the wiper blades Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv- ice position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.

The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

G 0 3 2 7 7 0

10 Maintenance and service

10

345

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily.

4. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Lower the wiper arm.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see Car washing (p. 363).

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 345)

Washer fluid - filling Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head- lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti- freeze must be used during winter.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser- voir and hoses.

For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and volume (p. 385).

Related information Wiper blades (p. 343)

Battery The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions, climatic conditions etc.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- tery.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

IMPORTANT

Only a traditional battery charger should ever be used when charging the battery.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

346

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for info- tainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the information dis- play about the main battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external bat- tery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the ground- ing point.

See Jump starting with battery (p. 257) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decrea- ses gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold fur- ther limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec- ommended or that the battery is con- nected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 346)

Starter battery - replacement (p. 347)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 348)

Battery - symbols There are information and warning symbols on the battery.

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information is available in the owner's manual.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains cor- rosive acid.

10 Maintenance and service

10

347

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recy- cling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner as it con- tains lead.

Related information Battery (p. 345)

Starter battery - replacement The starter battery in the car can be replaced without the help of a workshop.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- tery.

Removal First of all: Take the remote control key from the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before any electrical connections are touched - this is because the car's electrical system needs to store the necessary information to control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

348 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING

Connect and remove the positive and neg- ative cables in the correct order.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable.

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat- tery.

Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.

Move the battery aside.

Lift it up.

Fitting

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose. > Check that it is correctly connected to

both battery and outlet in the body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier sec- tion "Removal".)

8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)

9. Align the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See "Removal".)

For more information on the car's battery - Electrical system (p. 391).

Battery - Start/Stop Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip- ped with two 12 V batteries - one extra pow- erful battery for starting and one support bat- tery that helps during the Start/Stop func- tion's starting sequence.

For more information on Start/Stop - see Start/Stop* (p. 266).

For more information on the car's battery - see Jump starting with battery (p. 257) and Starter battery - specification (p. 392).

Battery Starting Auxiliary

Cold start capacityA, CCA (A)

760 120

SizeB, LWH (mm)

278175190 15090106

Capacity (Ah) 70 8

A In accordance with the SAE standard. B Largest possible size.

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 349

IMPORTANT

When replacing batteries in cars with the Start/Stop function, the AGM10 type bat- teries must be fitted.

NOTE

The higher the current take-off in the car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more the batteries must be charged = increased fuel consumption.

When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:

The engine starts automatically11 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).

The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

Location of the batteries

A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. (1) Starter battery12 (2) Support battery.

The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery used for starting. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may tempo- rarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external bat- tery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the ground- ing point.

See Jump starting with battery (p. 257) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

10 Absorbed Glass Mat 11 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position. 12 See Battery (p. 345) for a detailed description of the starter battery.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

350

NOTE

If the battery has become so discharged that everything is "black" and in principle the car does not have all the normal elec- trical functions and the engine is subse- quently started using an external battery or battery charger, then the Start/Stop func- tion will be activated. It will then be possi- ble for the engine to be auto-stopped but in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may fail to auto-start the engine due to inadequate capacity in the battery.

The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside tem- perature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an exter- nal battery charger.

If this is not possible then the recommen- dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged.

For more information on charging the starter battery, see Battery (p. 345).

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 346)

Fuses - general All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from dam- age by short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the

fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Location of central electrical units

Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Under the glovebox

Cargo area

Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/Stop)

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 356)

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 358)

10 Maintenance and service

10

351

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 360)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 361)

10 Maintenance and service

10

352

Fuses - in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353

General fuses, engine compartment On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration) Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com- partment box. The fuses in (C) are located under (A).

On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.

Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop13.

Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a work- shop13

Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.

Function A

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the gloveboxA

50

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the glovebox

50

Primary fuse for central electri- cal unit in cargo areaA

60

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the gloveboxA

60

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the gloveboxA

60

Electric additional heater*A 100

Heated windscreen*, left-hand side

40

Windscreen wipers 30

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fanA 40

Heated windscreen*, right- hand side

40

Function A

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

Headlamp washer* 20

Headlamp levelling*; Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*

10

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the glovebox

20

ABS 5

Adjustable steering force* 5

Engine control module; Trans- mission control module; Air- bags

10

Heated washer nozzles* 10

Light switches 5

13 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

354 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function A

Relay coils 5

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Relay coil in main relay for engine management system; Engine control module (4-cyl. 2.0 lB, 5, 6-cyl.)

10

Transmission control module 15

Solenoid clutch A/C (not 4-cyl. 2.0 lC, not 5-cyl. diesel); Sup- porting coolant pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

15

Relay coil in relay for solenoid clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel); Relay coil in relay for coolant pump (1.6 l petrol Start/Stop); Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop)

5

Start relayA 30

Function A

Ignition coils (1.6 l petrol, engine B4204T7); Glow control module (5-cyl. diesel)

10

Engine control module (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. petrol); Capacitor (6-cyl.)

20

Engine control module (petrol except 4-cyl. 2.0 lC)

10

Engine control module (1.6 l diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)

15

Engine control module (4-cyl. 2.0 lB)

20

Valves (1.6 l petrol); mass air flow sensor (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Thermostat (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- rolB); EVAP valve (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Cooling valve for cli- mate control system (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel); Cooling pump for EGR (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

10

Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. diesel, 6-cyl.); Control valves (5-cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6- cyl. petrol); Engine control module (5-cyl. petrol, 6-cyl.)

15

Function A

Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.); Valves (1.6 l, engine B4204T7; 5-cyl., 6-cyl.); Engine control module (6-cyl.); Solenoids (6- cyl. without turbo); Actuator motors, intake manifold (6-cyl. without turbo); Mass air flow sensor (engine B4204T7; 5-cyl. petrol); Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)

10

Valves (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Oil pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Lambda- sond, centre (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- rolB); Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

15

Lambda-sonds (1.6 l petrol, engine B4204T7); Lambda- sond (5-cyl. diesel); Control module, radiator roller cover (1.6 l diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)

10

Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Lambda-sond, rear (4- cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); EVAP valve (5, 6-cyl. petrol); Lambda- sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)

15

10 Maintenance and service

10

355

Function A

Ignition coils (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- rolB)

15

Diesel filter heater 20

Control module, radiator roller cover (5-cyl. petrol)

5

Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump auto- matic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop)

10

Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Glow control module (4- cyl. 2.0 l diesel); Oil pump (4- cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

15

Coolant pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- rolB)

50

Glow plugs (diesel) 70

Cooling fan (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 l petrol, 5-cyl. petrol)

60

Cooling fan (6-cyl., 4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)

80

Power steering 100

A For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 361).

B Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine. C However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.

Related information Fuses - under glovebox (p. 356)

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 358)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 360)

10 Maintenance and service

10

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect the info- tainment and seat functions, amongst other things.

Positions

Function A

Primary fuse for audio control module*; Primary fuse for fuses 16-20: Infotainment

40

Windscreen washers; Rear win- dow washer

25

Function A

12 V socket, cargo area* 15

Control panel, driver's door 20

Control panel, front passenger door

20

Function A

Control panel, rear passenger door, right

20

Control panel, rear passenger door, left

20

Keyless* 20

Power seat driver's side*

Electrically operated lumbar support (Inscription)

20

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357

Function A

Power seat passenger side*

Electrically operated lumbar support (Inscription)

20

Infotainment control module; ScreenA

5

Audio control unit (amplifier)*, Digital radio*; TV*

10

Audio or Control Module Sen- susA

15

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5

Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof; Climate sensor*; Damper motors, air intake

5

12 V socket, tunnel console 15

Seat heating, rear right* 15

Seat heating, rear left* 15

Seat heating (passenger side) 15

Function A

Seat heating (driver's side) 15

Parking assistance*; Parking camera*; Towbar control mod- ule*

BLIS*

5

AWD control module* 15

Active chassis - Four-C* 10

A Certain model variants.

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 358)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 360)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 361)

10 Maintenance and service

10

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox Fuses in the control module under the glove- box protect airbag and collision warning sys- tem functions, amongst other things.

Positions

Function A

Rear window wiper 15

Function A

Interior lighting; Driver's door control panel, power windows; Remote controlled garage door opener*; Power seats, front*

Electrically operated lumbar support (Inscription)

7,5

Combined instrument panel 5

Function A

Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; collision warning system*

10

Interior lighting; Rain sensor 7,5

Steering wheel module 7,5

Central locking system, fuel filler flap

10

Heated steering wheel* 15

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 359

Function A

Heated windscreen* 15

Unlocking, tailgate 10

Folding head restraint* 10

Fuel pump 20

Movement detector alarm*; Cli- mate panel

5

Steering lock 15

Siren*; Data link connector OBDII

5

Airbags 10

Collision warning* 5

Accelerator pedal sensor; Dim- ming interior rearview mirror*; Seat heating, rear*

Electric additional heater*

7,5

Infotainment control module (Performance); Audio (Perform- ance)

15

Brake lights 5

Function A

Sunroof* 20

Immobiliser 5

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 356)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 360)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 361)

10 Maintenance and service

10

360 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect trailer and electric drive functions, amongst other things.

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.

Positions

Function A

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

Rear window defroster 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Power operated tailgate* 20

Function A

Function A

Trailer socket 1* 40

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 356)

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 358)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 361)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.

Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop14.

Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a work- shop14.

Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.

For more information on Start/Stop - see Start/Stop* (p. 266).

Positions

Function A

Main fuse for central electrical unit in the engine compartment

175

Main fuse for central electronic module (CEM) under the glove- box, relay/fuse box under the glovebox, central electrical unit in cargo area

175

Function A

Electric additional heater* 100

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the glovebox

50

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the glovebox

60

14 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

362

Function A

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the glovebox

60

Primary fuse for central electri- cal unit in cargo area

60

Ventilation fan 40

Start relay 30

Internal diode 50

Support battery 70

Central electronic module (CEM) - reference voltage sup- port battery; Charging point support battery

15

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 356)

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 358)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 360)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 363

Car washing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Washing by hand Remove bird droppings from the paint-

work as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discol- our paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.

Hose down the underbody.

Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

For cleaning:

- Set the wiper blades to the service position, see Wiper blades (p. 343).

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong sol- vents.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

364

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.

Related information Polishing and waxing (p. 364)

Cleaning the interior (p. 365)

Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 365)

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spi- rit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Related information Car washing (p. 363)

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 365

Water and dirt-repellent coating The windows are treated with a surface coa- ting that improves visibility in difficult weather conditions.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* There is natural wear of the water- repellent coating.

Maintenance:

Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent prop- erties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scra- pers.

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors, see Win- dows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 98).

Related information Car washing (p. 363)

Rustproofing The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.

Inspection and maintenance Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean. The car's rustproofing needs to be checked regularly and touched-up if necessary in order for it to be maintained.

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be trea- ted at three-year intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs fur- ther treatment.

Related information Paint damage (p. 367)

Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.

Vacuuming is important prior to using clean- ing agents.

Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the bosses in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by your Volvo dealer.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

366

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Stains on leather upholstery Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre- serve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coa- ting, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appear- ance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will never- theless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year (or more if necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is available from your Volvo dealer.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.

Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

Washing instructions for leather upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the damp-

ened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.

The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.

Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-

moistened sponge and neutral soap.

Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic.

Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.

If the steering wheel has stains:

Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)

Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for group 1.

2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

10 Maintenance and service

10

367

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.

2. Same procedure as for group 1.

Stains on interior plastic parts, metal parts and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.

Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe- cial textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Related information Car washing (p. 363)

Paint damage Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paint- work damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint- work should be rectified immediately.

Materials

primer15 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic- coated bumpers

basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks16

masking tape

fine sand paper15.

Colour code

Code for the car's colour

It is important that the correct colour is used. For product label location, see Type designa- tions (p. 370).

15 If required. 16 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

368

Repair minor paintwork damage such as stone chips and scratches

G 0 2 1 8 3 2

Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.

2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.

4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to pro- tect the undamaged paintwork.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.

Related information Rustproofing (p. 365)

SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

11

370

Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification num- ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on a label in the car.

11 Specifications

11

}} 371

Label location

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with an authorised Volvo

dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type

|| 11 Specifications

11

372

approval number. The label is visible when the right rear door is opened.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code and engine serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number)

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Related information Weights (p. 374)

Engine specifications (p. 377)

11 Specifications

11

373

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2774

B Length 4644

C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1789

D Load length, floor 972

E Height 1713

F Load height 802

G Front track 1632

Dimensions mm

H Rear track 1586

I Load width, floor 1090

J Width 1891

K Width including door mirrors 2120

L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1891

11 Specifications

11

374

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (p. 375) (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxili- ary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For information on label location, see Type des- ignations (p. 370).

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

Related information Towing capacity and towball load (p.

375)

11 Specifications

11

}} 375

Towing capacity and towball load

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

NOTE

The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing bracket is recommended for trailers heav- ier than 1800 kg.

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

All All All 01200 50

T5 B4204T7 Automatic, MPS6 1800 90

T5 B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1600 75

T5 B4204T15 Automatic, TG-81SC 1600 75

3.2 AWD B6324S5 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

T6 B4204T9 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

T6 AWD B6304T4 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

D3 D5204T7 Manual, M66 1600 75

D3 D5204T7 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75

D4 D4204T5 Manual, M66 1800 90

D4 D4204T5 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

D4 AWD D5244T12 Manual, M66 1800 90

D4 AWD D5244T12 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

D4 AWD D5244T17 Manual, M66 1800 90

|| 11 Specifications

11

376

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

D4 AWD D5244T17 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

D5 AWD D5244T11 Manual, M66 1800 90

D5 AWD D5244T15 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 370).

Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

Related information Weights (p. 374)

Driving with a trailer (p. 294)

Trailer stabiliser - TSA (p. 300)

11 Specifications

11

}} 377

Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine codeA Output

(kW/rpm)

Output

(hp/rpm)

Torque

(Nm/rpm)

No. of cylin- ders

Bore

(mm)

Stroke

(mm)

Swept vol- ume

(litres)

Compres- sion ratio

T5 B4204T7 177/5500 240/5500 320/1800-5000 4 87,5 83.1 1.999 10.0:1

T5 B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/1500-4800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1

T5 B4204T15 161/5500 220/5500 350/1500-4000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1

T6 B4204T9 225/5700 306/5700 400/2100-4500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10,3:1

T6 AWD B6304T4 224/5600 304/5600 440/21004200 6 82.0 93.2 2.953 9.3:1

3.2 AWD B6324S5 179/6400 243/6400 320/3200 6 84 96 3.192 10.8:1

D3 D5204T7 100/3500 136/3500 350/1500-2250 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1

D4 D4204T5 133/4250 181/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1

D4 AWD D5244T12 133/4000 181/4000 420/15002500 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1

D4 AWD D5244T17 120/4000 163/4000 420/15002500 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1

D5 AWD D5244T11B 158/4000 215/4000 420/15003250 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

D5 AWD D5244T15C 158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 370). B Manual gearbox C Automatic gearbox

|| 11 Specifications

11

378

Related information Coolant - grade and volume (p. 382)

Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 380)

11 Specifications

11

379

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level (p. 330) more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hotter than +40 C.

The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 380)

Engine oil - general (p. 329)

11 Specifications

11

380

Engine oil - grade and volume Engine oil grade and volume for each respec- tive engine alternative can be read in the table.

Volvo recommends:

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T6 AWD B6304T4 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

approx 6.8

3.2 AWD B6324S5 approx 6.8

D3 D5204T7 approx. 5.9

D4 AWD D5244T12 approx. 5.9

D4 AWD D5244T17 approx. 5.9

D5 AWD D5244T11B approx. 5.9

D5 AWD D5244T15C approx. 5.9

11 Specifications

11

381

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T5 B4204T11 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or 0w20 VCC RBS0-2AE approx. 5.4

T5 B4204T15 approx. 5.4

T6 B4204T9 approx. 5.4

D4 D4204T5 approx. 5.6

T5 B4204T7

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

approx. 5.4

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 370). B Manual gearbox. C Automatic gearbox.

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.

379)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 330)

11 Specifications

11

382

Coolant - grade and volume Approved coolant volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the pack- aging.

EngineA Volume

(litres)

3.2 AWD B6324S5 8.9

T6 AWD B6304T4

D3 D5204T7

D4 AWD D5244T12

D4 AWD D5244T17

D5 AWD D5244T15

D5 AWD D5244T11

D4 D4204T5 8,9 (9,2B)

EngineA Volume

(litres)

T5 B4204T11 8,3 (8,7B)

T5 B4204T15

T6 B4204T9

T5 B4204T7 10.5

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 370).

B Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.

Related information Coolant - level (p. 333)

2 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

11 Specifications

11

}} 383

Transmission fluid - grade and volume The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.

Manual gearbox

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

M66 approx. 1.9 (approx. 1.45A) BOT 350M3

A Applies to the D4204T5 engine.

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be changed dur- ing its service life. However, it may be nec- essary under adverse driving conditions.

Automatic gearbox

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MPS6 approx. 7.3 BOT 341

TF-80SC approx. 7.0 AW1

TG-81SC approx. 6.6A

approx. 7.5B AW1

A Petrol engines B Diesel engines

|| 11 Specifications

11

384

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be changed dur- ing its service life. However, it may be nec- essary under adverse driving conditions.

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.

379)

Type designations (p. 370)

11 Specifications

11

385

Brake fluid - grade and volume The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer force from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.

Prescribed grade: DOT 4

Volume: 0.6 litres

Related information Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 334)

Power steering fluid - grade Power steering fluid is the denomination of the medium used in the car's power steering system.

Prescribed grade: WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Related information Power steering fluid - level (p. 335)

Washer fluid - quality and volume Washer fluid is used, together with wind- screen and rear window wipers (p. 92) to keep the car's windows and headlamps clean and ensure visibility when driving.

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom- mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur- ing cold weather and below freezing point.

Volume:

Cars with headlamp washing: 6.5 litres.

Cars without headlamp washing: 4.5 litres.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 345)

Wiper blades (p. 343)

11 Specifications

11

386

Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Petrol engine approx. 70 Petrol: Fuel - petrol (p. 290)

Diesel engine approx. 70 Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 290)

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 288)

Engine specifications (p. 377)

11 Specifications

11

}} 387

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams per km.

Explanation

gram/km

litre/100 km

urban driving

extra-urban driving

combined driving

XC60

T5 (B4204T11)

T6 (B4204T9)

T6 AWD (B6304T4) 354 15.2 188 8.1 249 10.7

3.2 AWD (B6324S5) 322 13.8 176 7.6 229 9.9

D3 (D5204T7) 169 6.4 122 4.6 139 5.3

D3 (D5204T7) 207 7.9 131 5.0 159 6.0

|| 11 Specifications

11

388

XC60

D4 (D4204T5)

D4 (D4204T5)

D4 AWD (D5244T12) 158 6.0 128 4.9 139 5.3

D4 AWD (D5244T12) 222 8.5 139 5.3 169 6.4

D4 AWD (D5244T17) 158 6.0 128 4.9 139 5.3

D4 AWD (D5244T17) 222 8.5 139 5.3 169 6.4

D5 AWD (D5244T11) 158 6.0 128 4.9 139 5.3

D5 AWD (D5244T15) 222 8.5 139 5.3 169 6.4

11 Specifications

11

389

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement.

Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles3, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:

The driver's driving style.

If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increases.

High speed results in increased wind resistance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to3.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles3 which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Economical driving (p. 293)

Weights (p. 374)

3 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legisla- tion. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

11 Specifications

11

390

Tyres - approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

XC60

Engine

Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front

(kPa)B Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All engines

235/65 R 17

235/60 R 18

235/55 R 19

255/45 R 20

0 160 240 240 270 270 270

160 + 240 240 270 270

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 310)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 315)

Type designations (p. 370)

11 Specifications

11

391

Electrical system The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna- tor.

Starter battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the car.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and reserve capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

Related information Starter battery - specification (p. 392)

Starter battery - replacement (p. 347)

Battery (p. 345)

11 Specifications

11

392

Starter battery - specification The starter battery is used to drive the starter motor and other electrical equipment in the car.

Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

Petrol (Ethanol) 12 520800 100160

Diesel 12 700800 135160

Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function 12 760A 135

A Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and reserve capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

The starter battery's container size should be consistent with the original battery's dimensions.

The starter battery's height is different depending on size.

Related information Starter battery - replacement (p. 347)

Battery (p. 345)

11 Specifications

11

393

Type approval - remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key sys- tem can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard

Country/Area

EU, China

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Country/Area

EU

Korea

Country/Area

China

Hong Kong

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

154)

Type approval - radar system Type approval for the radar system can be read in the table.

|| 11 Specifications

11

394

Coun- try/ Area

Singa- pore

IDA: Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore.

Brazil

Europe Delphi Electronics &

Safety hereby declares that L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This dec- laration of conformity may, if necessary, be consulted with Delphi Electronics & Safety / One Corporate Center / Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005 USA.

Related information Radar sensor (p. 196)

11 Specifications

11

}} 395

Type approval - Bluetooth

Type approval for Bluetooth can be read in the table.

|| 11 Specifications

11

396

Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)

Country/ Area

Countries in the EU:

Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.

Type of equipment: Bluetooth device

For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing

11 Specifications

11

}} 397

Country/ Area

Czech Republic:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. tmto prohlauje, e tento Bluetooth Module je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES.

Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Germany: Hiermit erklrt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gert Bluetooth Module in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Estonia: Kesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele.

UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Greece: Alpine Electronics, Inc. Bluetooth Module 1999/5/ .

France: Par la prsente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dclare que l'appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latvia: Ar o Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklar, ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.

Lithuania: iuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad is Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

|| 11 Specifications

11

398

Country/ Area

Nether- lands:

Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Hungary: Alulrott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak.

Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. owiadcza, e Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth Module est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direk- tive 1999/5/ES.

Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. tmto vyhlasuje, e Bluetooth Module spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smer- nice 1999/5/ES.

Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa tten ett Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Sweden: Hrmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth Module str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklrer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

11 Specifications

11

}} 399

Country/ Area

China:

1.

2.4 - 2.4835 GHz

(EIRP) 10dBi 100 mW 20 dBm

10dBi 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP)

20 ppm

() (2.5 )

-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)

-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)

-30 dBm / 1 MHz ( 1 - 12.75 GHz)

2. ( )

3.

4.

5.

|| 11 Specifications

11

400

Country/ Area

Taiwan:

11 Specifications

11

}} 401

Country/ Area

South Korea:

Volvo Car Korea

: KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L3, KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L2 and KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L1

: Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio

: IAM2.1

: March/2010

Alpine Electronics, Inc

Made in Japan

Volvo Car Korea

2 726-173 4

1588-1777

http://www.volvocars.com/kr

|| 11 Specifications

11

402

Country/ Area

The United Arab Emi- rates:

South Africa:

Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1

Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.

Oman

11 Specifications

11

}} 403

Licenses

Sensus software

This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

|| 11 Specifications

11

404

This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team.

This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved

Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice

This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU General Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project License (FreeType License) and other different and/or additional copyright licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links how to access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, LGPLv3, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source code of said free/open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer.

This offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of

this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses software copyrighted v2.4.3/2010 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

This product includes software under following licenses:

GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- licenses/gpl-2.0.html

Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista 2.6.31 kernel and kernel from L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)

uBoot (based on v2009.08)

busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)

GCC runtime library exception: http:// www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html

libgcc_s.so.1

LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ lgpl.html

Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1

The FreeType Project License: http:// www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT

libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)

Linux software

This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or

GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software.

You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013

The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind.

By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code.

Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code.

DivX

DivX Certified to play DivX video. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are

11 Specifications

11

}} 405

registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.

Gracenote End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Grace- note ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identifica- tion and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Grace- note data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote serv- ers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accord-

ance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device.

You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE- NOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREE- MENT.

You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is ter- minated you agree to cease all use of Grace- note data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all own- ership rights. Gracenote will under no circum- stances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identi- fier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything

about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertak- ings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote soft- ware or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Gracenote has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN- TIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA- BILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR- POSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-

|| 11 Specifications

11

406 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

QUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES.

Gracenote, Inc. 2009

Related information Volvo Sensus (p. 69)

Symbols in the display There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information sym- bols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown in the combined instrument panel at the same time.

- Information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the combined instru- ment panel, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Low oil pressure (p. 66)

Parking brake applied

(p. 66), (p. 281)

Parking brake applied, alterna- tive symbol

(p. 66)

Symbol Specification See

Airbags SRS (p. 26), (p. 66)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 23), (p. 66)

Alternator not charging

(p. 66)

Fault in brake system

(p. 66), (p. 278)

Warning, safety mode

(p. 26), (p. 36), (p. 66), (p. 263)

Control symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

ABL fault* (p. 65), (p. 86)

Emissions sys- tem

(p. 65)

ABS fault (p. 65), (p. 278)

Rear fog lamp on (p. 65), (p. 87)

11 Specifications

11

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 407

Symbol Specification See

Stability system, DSTC, Hill descent control, Trailer stability assist

(p. 65), (p. 277), (p. 181), (p. 300)

Stability system, sport mode

(p. 65), (p. 181)

Engine preheater (diesel)

(p. 65)

Low level in fuel tank

(p. 65), (p. 135)

Information, read display text

(p. 65)

Main beam On (p. 65), (p. 83)

Left-hand direc- tion indicators

(p. 65)

Right-hand direc- tion indicators

(p. 65)

Start/Stop*, engine auto- stopped

(p. 65), (p. 273)

Symbol Specification See

ECO function* on (p. 65), (p. 275)

Not used

Information symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Cruise control* (p. 185)

Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 200)

Adaptive cruise control*, time inter- val

(p. 187), (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert)

(p. 192), (p. 202)

Radar sensor* (p. 200), (p. 204), (p. 222)

Symbol Specification See

Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*

(p. 211), (p. 222), (p. 226), (p. 231)

Auto Brake*, Dis- tance Warning* (Distance Alert), City SafetyTM, Col- lision warning sys- tem*

(p. 204), (p. 211), (p. 222)

ABL system* (p. 86)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Time for a break

(p. 225)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Time for a break

(p. 226)

Parking brake (p. 281)

Rain sensor* (p. 92)

Active high beam, AHB (Active High Beam)*

(p. 84)

|| 11 Specifications

11

408 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Specification See

Windscreen sen- sor*

(p. 84)

Start/Stop* (p. 273)

Start/Stop* (p. 273)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane Depar- ture Warning (LDW)

(p. 226), (p. 231)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane Depar- ture Warning*

(p. 229)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane Depar- ture Warning*

(p. 231)

Recorded speed information*

(p. 182)

Engine block and passenger com- partment heater*

(p. 135)

Symbol Specification See

Activated timer* (p. 135)

Activated timer* (p. 135)

Low battery (p. 135)

Fuel filler flap, right-hand side

(p. 288)

Information symbols in the roof console display

Symbol Specification See

Seatbelt reminder (p. 25)

Airbag, passenger seat, activated

(p. 29)

Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated

(p. 29)

Related information Combined instrument panel - meaning of

indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Messages - handling (p. 105)

11 Specifications

11

409

12 Alphabetical Index

12

410

A

ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 187

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 86

Active chassis - FOUR-C......................... 178

Active high beam....................................... 84

Active Xenon headlamps........................... 86

Active Yaw Control.................................. 178

Adapting driving characteristics...... 178, 245

Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 187 change cruise control functionality..... 196 deactivate........................................... 194 fault tracing......................................... 199 function............................................... 188 managing speed................................. 191 overtaking........................................... 193 overview.............................................. 190 radar sensor........................................ 196 setting the time interval...................... 192 standby mode..................................... 192 temporary deactivation....................... 192

Additional heater electric........................................ 137, 138 fuel-driven........................................... 137

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 78

Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 29 driver's side.................................... 28, 35 passenger side......................... 28, 29, 35

AIRBAG ..................................................... 28

Airbag system............................................ 27 warning symbol.................................... 26

Air cleaning material............................................... 121 passenger compartment.... 119, 120, 121

Air conditioning........................................ 127

Air conditioning system repair................................................... 336

Air distribution.......................................... 122 Recirculation....................................... 129 table.................................................... 130

Air quality system IAQS........................... 121

Alarm........................................ 174, 175, 176 alarm indicator.................................... 175 alarm signals....................................... 176 automatic re-arming........................... 175 checking the alarm............................. 158 reduced alarm level............................ 176 remote control key not working.......... 176

Alcolock................................................... 247

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 120

All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 277

All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 277

Approach lighting.............................. 91, 156

Automatic car washes............................. 363

Automatic gearbox.......................... 259, 263 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 260 towing and recovery........................... 301 trailer................................................... 295

Automatic relocking................................. 167

AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 277

B

Backrest..................................................... 73 front seat, lowering............................... 73

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 76

Bag holder .............................................. 147

Battery..................................... 286, 345, 392 jump starting....................................... 257 maintenance....................................... 345 overload.............................................. 286 remote control key/PCC..................... 161 specification....................................... 392 symbols on the battery....................... 346 warning symbols................................. 346

Blind panorama roof.................................... 101

BLIS................................................. 240, 241

12 Alphabetical Index

12

411

Bonnet, opening...................................... 327

Booster seat lowering................................................ 47 raising................................................... 46 seating position.................................... 45

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 334

Brake fluid grade and volume............................... 385

Brake light.................................................. 88

Brakes.............................................. 278, 280 Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 279 brake light............................................. 88 brake system...................... 278, 279, 280 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 280 emergency brake lights........................ 88 filling brake fluid.................................. 335 handbrake........................................... 281 symbols in the combined instrument panel................................................... 279

Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 337

C

Camera sensor................................ 207, 220

Car care................................................... 363

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 366

Cargo area cargo cover......................................... 152 lighting.................................................. 90 mounting points.................................. 146 protective net...................................... 148

Cargo cover............................................. 152

Car upholstery......................................... 365

Car washing............................................. 363

Catalytic converter................................... 291 Recovery............................................. 302

Chassis settings...................................... 178

Checking the engine oil level................... 329

Children child safety locks.................................. 38 child seat and airbag............................ 45 child seats and side airbags................. 32 location in car....................................... 45 safety.............................................. 32, 38

Child safety locks.................................... 173

Child seat integrated two-stage booster seat....... 45

Child seats................................................. 38 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 48 recommended...................................... 40 size classes for child seats with ISO- FIX fixture system................................. 49 types..................................................... 50 upper mounting points for child seats.. 52

City Safety............................................ 205

Cleaning automatic car wash............................ 363 car washing........................................ 363 rims..................................................... 364 seatbelts............................................. 367 upholstery........................................... 365

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 120

Climate control actual temperature............................. 119 auto-regulation................................... 126 general................................................ 118 personal preferences.......................... 121 sensors............................................... 119 temperature control............................ 127

Clock, adjustment...................................... 69

CO2 emissions......................................... 387

Collision..................................................... 36

Collision warning............................. 212, 213

Collision warning system function............................................... 213 general limitations............................... 218 operation............................................. 217 Pedestrian detection........................... 216 Radar sensor.............................. 196, 205

Collision Warning System with Auto Brake....................................................... 212

Colour code, paint................................... 367

12 Alphabetical Index

12

412

Combined instrument panel................ 60, 61

Compass................................................... 99 calibration............................................. 99

Condensation in headlamps.................... 363

Controls, lights........................................... 79

Control symbols................................... 61, 63

Coolant volume and grade............................... 382

Coolant, checking and filling................... 333

Cooling system........................................ 285 overheating......................................... 285

Cornering lights......................................... 87

Corner Traction Control........................... 179

Crash, see Collision................................... 36

Cruise control.......................................... 185 deactivate........................................... 187 managing speed................................. 185 resume set speed............................... 187 temporary deactivation....................... 186

CTA.......................................................... 243

Cyclist detection...................................... 214

CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 120

D

Daytime running lights............................... 82

Deadlock.................................................. 172 deactivation........................................ 172 temporary deactivation....................... 172

Defroster.................................................. 128

Detachable towbar storage................................................ 296

Diesel....................................................... 290 run out of fuel..................................... 290

Diesel particle filter.................................. 292

Dimensions.............................................. 373

Dipstick, electronic.......................... 331, 332

Direction indicator..................................... 89

Direction indicators.................................... 89

direction of rotation................................. 306

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 265

Display lighting.......................................... 81

Distance Warning.................................... 202 Limitations.......................................... 203 Symbols and messages..................... 204

Door mirrors............................................... 96 automatic dimming............................... 97

Driver Alert Control.................................. 224 operation............................................. 225

Driver Alert System.................................. 224

Driving...................................................... 287 cooling system.................................... 285 with a tailer......................................... 294 with the tailgate open......................... 286

Driving in water........................................ 285

Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 375 towing capacity.................................. 375

E

ECC, electronic climate control............... 124

Eco Cruise............................................... 275

EcoGuide................................................... 64

Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 21

Economical driving.................................. 293

ECO pressure.......................................... 390

Electrical socket...................................... 144 cargo area........................................... 147

Electrical system...................................... 391

Electric parking brake low battery voltage............................. 281

Electronic climate control - ECC............. 124

12 Alphabetical Index

12

413

Emergency equipment first aid kit........................................... 317 warning triangle.................................. 316

Emergency puncture repair............. 317, 318 action.................................................. 319 inflating the tyres................................ 322 rechecking.......................................... 321

Emergency puncture repair kit location............................................... 318 overview.............................................. 318 sealing fluid......................................... 322

Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 387

Engine deactivate........................................... 253 overheating......................................... 294 start..................................................... 252 Start/Stop........................................... 266

Engine and passenger compartment heater direct start/immediate stop................ 133 messages........................................... 135 timer.................................................... 133

Engine block heater................................. 132

Engine braking, automatic....................... 277

Engine compartment coolant................................................ 333 oil........................................................ 329 overview.............................................. 327 power steering fluid............................ 335

Engine drag control................................. 179

Engine oil......................................... 329, 379 adverse driving conditions.................. 379 filter..................................................... 329 grade and volume............................... 380

Engine specifications............................... 377

Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 Driver Alert Control............................. 226 Lane Departure Warning..................... 231 see Messages and symbols....... 200, 283

Error messages in BLIS........................... 245

ERS - Remote Start................................. 254

exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 286

External dimensions................................ 373

F

Fan ECC.................................................... 126

Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 208

First aid.................................................... 317

First aid kit............................................... 317

Fluids, capacities............. 382, 383, 385, 386

Fluids and oils.......................... 382, 383, 385

Fog lamp rear........................................................ 87

Foot brake............................... 278, 279, 280

FOUR-C - Active chassis......................... 178

FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 21

Fuel.................................................. 289, 290 fuel consumption................................ 387 fuel economy.............................. 315, 316 fuel filter.............................................. 291

Fuel-driven heater direct start/immediate stop................ 133 timer.................................................... 133

Fuelling filling................................................... 288 fuel cap............................................... 288 fuel filler flap....................................... 288 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 288

Fuel tank volume................................................ 386

Fuse box.................................................. 350

Fuses....................................................... 350 cargo area........................................... 360 changing............................................. 350 cold zone............................................ 361 engine compartment.......................... 352 General............................................... 350 Start/Stop........................................... 361 under glovebox........................... 356, 358

12 Alphabetical Index

12

414

G

Gearbox................................................... 258 automatic.................................... 259, 263 manual................................................ 258

Gear indicator.......................................... 259

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 265

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement................................................. 265

Geartronic................................................ 260

Glass laminated/reinforced............................. 21

Glovebox................................................. 143 locking................................................ 169

Gross vehicle weight............................... 374

GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 259

H

Handbrake............................................... 281

Hazard warning flashers............................ 88

HDC......................................................... 277

Headlamp control...................................... 79

Headlamp levelling.................................... 81

Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 92

Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 92 Active Bending Lights .......................... 92

Headlamps............................................... 337

head restraint centre seat, rear.................................... 76 lowering.......................................... 76, 77

Heated washer nozzles.............................. 93

Heating rearview and door mirrors.................... 98 rear window.......................................... 98 seats................................................... 125 steering wheel....................................... 79

Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 17

High engine temperature......................... 294

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 93

Hill Descent Control................................. 277

Hill Start Assist........................................ 266

Home safe light duration........................... 91

Horn........................................................... 78

I

IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 121

Immobiliser.............................................. 155

Indicator symbols...................................... 65

Inflatable curtain.................................. 32, 35

Information button, PCC.......................... 158

Information display.............................. 60, 61

Inlaid mats............................................... 143

Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 81

Instrument overview left-hand drive car................................ 54 right-hand drive car.............................. 57

Instruments and controls..................... 54, 57

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) Air cleaning......................................... 121

Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 89

Interior rearview mirror............................... 98 automatic dimming............................... 99

Intermittent wiping..................................... 92

J

Jack......................................................... 309

Jacket holder........................................... 142

Journey statistics..................................... 116

Jump starting........................................... 257

12 Alphabetical Index

12

415

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 374

Key........................................... 154, 155, 165

Key blade......................................... 159, 160

Keyless drive.... 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 252

Keyless - locking..................................... 164

Keyless start (keyless drive) 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 252

Keyless - unlocking................................. 164

Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 78

Key positions............................................. 71

L

Labels...................................................... 370

Laminated glass......................................... 21

Lamps, see Lighting................................ 336

Lane Departure Control................... 228, 229

Lane keeping assistant operation..................................... 229, 230

Laser sensor............................................ 209

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 366

Light indications, PCC............................. 158

Lighting.................................................... 336 Active Xenon headlamps...................... 86 approach lighting.......................... 91, 156 automatic lighting, passenger com- partment............................................... 90 bulbs, specifications........................... 342 controls................................................. 89 cornering lights..................................... 87 daytime running lights.......................... 82 display lighting...................................... 81 headlamp levelling................................ 81 home safe lighting................................ 91 instrument lighting................................ 81 in the passenger compartment............. 89 main/dipped beam............................... 83 position/parking lamps......................... 81 rear fog lamp........................................ 87 tunnel detection.................................... 83

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 337 bulb holder rear: direction indicators rear, rear fog lamp and reversing lamp.................................................... 340 cargo area........................................... 341 dipped beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 339 direction indicators, front.................... 340 main beam (cars with active xenon headlamps)......................................... 339 main beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 339

number plate lighting.......................... 341 vanity mirror........................................ 342

Loading cargo area........................................... 145 General............................................... 145 long load............................................. 146 roof load............................................. 146

Lock locking................................................ 167 unlocking.................................... 167, 168

Lockable wheel bolts............................... 308

Lock confirmation ................................... 155

Locking/unlocking glovebox............................................. 169 inside.................................................. 168 tailgate................................................ 169

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 83

Main beam, automatic activation.............. 84

maintenance Rustproofing....................................... 365

Manual gearbox....................................... 258 GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 259 Towing and recovery.......................... 301 trailer................................................... 295

12 Alphabetical Index

12

416

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 260

Max. roof load.......................................... 374

Memory function in seat............................ 74

Menus Combined instrument panel............... 103 menu overview.................................... 104

Messages................................................ 105 Information display............................. 104

Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 211, 222 Driver Alert Control............................. 226 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater........................... 135 Lane Departure Warning..................... 231

Messages in BLIS.................................... 245

Meters fuel gauge....................................... 60, 62 speedometer................................... 60, 62 tachometer..................................... 60, 62

misting attending to the windows................... 118

Misting condensation in headlamps............... 363

Mood lighting............................................. 90

MY CAR................................................... 106

O

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 379, 380

Oil level low.............................................. 329

Output...................................................... 377

outside temperature gauge....................... 68

Overheating............................................. 294

Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 21

P

PACOS....................................................... 29

Paddle on the steering wheel.................... 78

Paintwork colour code......................................... 367 damage and touch-up........................ 367

Panel lighting............................................. 81

Panic function.......................................... 156

Panorama roof blind.................................................... 101 opening and closing........................... 101 ventilation position.............................. 102

Park Assist............................................... 233 backward............................................ 234 fault indicator...................................... 236

function............................................... 233 parking assistance sensors................ 236

Park assist camera.................................. 237 settings............................................... 239

Parking brake........................................... 281

Passenger compartment filter................. 120

Passenger compartment heater.............. 132

PCC Personal Car Communicator functions............................................. 156 range........................................... 159, 162

Pedestrian detection................................ 212

Petrol grade............................................. 290

Polishing.................................................. 364

Position/parking lamps.............................. 81

Power guide............................................... 64

Power operated tailgate.......................... 170

Power panorama roof.............................. 100

Power seat................................................. 74

Powershift gearbox.......................... 263, 301

Power steering fluid grade................................................... 385

Power windows......................................... 94

Protective grille........................................ 151

Protective net........................................... 151

12 Alphabetical Index

12

417

Q

Queue Assist............................................ 194

Queue Assistant....................................... 194

R

Radar sensor........................................... 188 Limitations.................................. 196, 197

Rain sensor................................................ 92

Rear bulbs location............................................... 341

Rear seat Heating............................................... 125

Rearview and door mirrors compass............................................... 99 door...................................................... 96 electrically retractable........................... 97 heating.................................................. 98 interior................................................... 98

Rear window, defrosting............................ 98

Recommendations during driving............ 287

Recommended child seats table...................................................... 40

Recovery.................................................. 303

Refrigerant............................................... 336

Regeneration........................................... 292

Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 350

Remote control immobiliser..................... 156

Remote control key......................... 154, 155 battery replacement............................ 161 detachable key blade................. 159, 160 functions............................................. 156 loss..................................................... 154 range........................................... 157, 162

Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 393

Remote Start - ERS................................. 254

Resetting, trip meter................ 110, 113, 115

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 97

Resetting the power windows................... 96

Retractable power door mirrors................. 97

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 258

Road sign information............................. 182 Limitations.......................................... 184 operation............................................. 182

Roll-over protection ROPS (Roll Over Protection System).... 35

Roof load, max. weight............................ 374

ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 35

Rustproofing............................................ 365

S

Safety lock children................................................. 38

Safety mode.............................................. 36 moving the car...................................... 38 start attempt......................................... 37

Sealing fluid............................................. 322

Seat, see Seats.......................................... 73

Seatbelt...................................................... 23 loosen................................................... 24 pregnancy............................................. 24 putting on............................................. 24 rear seat................................................ 25 seatbelt reminder.................................. 25 seatbelt tensioner................................. 26

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 25

Seatbelt tensioner................................ 26, 35

Seats.......................................................... 73 head restraints, rear.............................. 76 heating................................................ 125 Heating............................................... 125 lowering the front backrest................... 73 lowering the rear backrest.................... 76 power.................................................... 74

Sensus....................................................... 69

Service position....................................... 343

Service programme................................. 324

12 Alphabetical Index

12

418

Set time interval....................................... 202

Side airbag SIPS.................................. 31, 35

SIPS airbag................................................ 31

Skidding................................................... 287

slippery driving conditions....................... 287

Soot filter................................................. 292

SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 292

spare wheel............................................. 312 installation........................................... 314

Speed ratings, tyres................................. 311

Spin control............................................. 178

Stability and traction control system 178, 181

operation............................................. 179

Stability system....................................... 178

Stains....................................................... 365

Start/Stop................................................ 266 Function and operation...................... 267 the engine does not stop.................... 269

Steering force, speed related.................. 245

Steering force level, see Steering force... 245

Steering lock............................................ 253

Steering wheel........................................... 78 heating.................................................. 79 keypad.................................................. 78

paddle................................................... 78 steering wheel adjustment.................... 78

Stone chips and scratches...................... 367

Storage spaces glovebox............................................. 143 Jacket holder...................................... 142 tunnel console.................................... 142

Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 140

Switching off the engine.......................... 253

Symbols indicator symbols..................... 61, 63, 65 warning symbols............................. 61, 63

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 211, 222 Driver Alert Control............................. 226 Lane Departure Warning..................... 231

System tripping.................................................. 35

T

Tailgate.................................................... 170 close................................................... 170 Locking/unlocking.............................. 169

Open................................................... 170 power.................................................. 170

Temperature actual temperature............................. 119

Temperature control................................ 127

Tools........................................................ 308

Total airing function......................... 118, 168

Towbar detachable, attachment...................... 297 detachable, removal........................... 299

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 296

Towbar - detachable attachment/removal.................... 297, 299

Towing..................................................... 301 towing eye.......................................... 302

Towing bracket........................................ 296 specifications...................................... 297

Towing capacity and towball load........... 375

Towing eye.............................................. 302

Traction control........................................ 178

Trailer....................................................... 294 cable................................................... 294 driving with a trailer............................ 294 snaking............................................... 300

Trailer stability assist............................... 179

Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 300

12 Alphabetical Index

12

419

Transmission............................................ 258

Transmission oil volume and grade............................... 383

Transponder.............................................. 17

Tread depth............................................. 309

Tread wear indicators.............................. 308

Trip computer.......... 107, 108, 112, 115, 116

Trip meter.................................................. 69

Trip meter, resetting................ 110, 113, 115

Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 199

TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 179, 300

Tunnel console........................................ 142 12 V socket......................................... 144 cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 142

Tunnel detection........................................ 83

Type approval Bluetooth.......................................... 395 radar system....................................... 393 remote control key system................. 393

Type designations................................... 370

Tyre dimension........................................ 310

Tyre load index........................................ 311

Tyre pressure label.................................. 315

Tyres direction of rotation............................ 306 maintenance....................................... 306 pressure...................................... 315, 390 puncture repair................................... 317 specifications...................................... 390 tread depth......................................... 309 tread wear indicators.......................... 308 winter tyres......................................... 309

U

Unlocking from the inside.................................... 168 from the outside................................. 167

Unlocking with the key blade................... 165

V

Vanity mirror...................................... 90, 143

Ventilation................................................ 122

Vibration damper..................................... 296

Volvo Sensus............................................. 69

W

Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 188 collision warning system.................... 217 stability and traction control system.. 178

Warning lamps Airbags SRS....................................... 66 alternator not charging......................... 66 Fault in brake system........................... 66 Low oil pressure................................... 66 Parking brake applied........................... 66 seatbelt reminder............................ 25, 66 Warning................................................ 66

Warning sound collision warning system.................... 217

Warning symbols........................... 61, 63, 66

Warning triangle....................................... 316

Washer fluid volume................................................ 385

Washer fluid, filling................................... 345

Washer nozzles, heated............................. 93

Washers rear window.......................................... 94 washer fluid, filling.............................. 345 windscreen........................................... 93

Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 365

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 365

12 Alphabetical Index

12

420

Waxing..................................................... 364

Weights kerb weight......................................... 374

Wheel bolts.............................................. 308 lockable.............................................. 308

Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 310

Wheel rims cleaning.............................................. 364

Wheels installation........................................... 314 removal............................................... 312 snow chains........................................ 309

Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 33

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 34 seating position.................................... 34 whiplash protection........................ 33, 35

Windows, rearview and door mirrors. 21, 365

Windscreen heating................................................ 128

Windscreen, heating.................................. 98

Windscreen washing.................................. 93

Windscreen wiper...................................... 92 rain sensor............................................ 92

Winter driving........................................... 287

Winter tyres.............................................. 309

Wiper blades............................................ 343 changing............................................. 344 Cleaning.............................................. 345 replacing, rear window....................

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the XC60 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo XC60 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo XC60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo XC60 2014 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.